JP6842932B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

As a conventional game machine, there is a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the reel according to the operation of the player. For example, the ratio of the paid-out game medium amount to the input game medium amount. It is known that the payout rate setting means for setting the payout rate (including the winning probability of replay, the same applies hereinafter) to one of a plurality of predetermined stages is provided.

In this type of gaming machine, there are six levels of ball ejection rates that indicate the ratio of the total number of medals paid out to the player to the total number of medals inserted into the gaming machine. The game is played with the set. The setting of the payout rate is usually changed by preparing a setting key owned by, for example, a store manager or a manager who has a certain authority of the hall or more and operating the setting key inside the housing. ..

Further, in a conventional game machine, in general, information necessary for performing various games, information on a set ball ejection rate, and the like are stored in a RAM (random) provided on a control board that controls game processing. It is temporarily stored in the access memory), and the information stored in the RAM is updated when the operating game or the setting of the ball output rate is changed.

Further, in the game machine shown in Patent Document 1 below, a plurality of games different from normal games such as low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. Therefore, in such game machines, low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. If the ball output rate setting is changed during operation, the information required for the operation of these games stored in the RAM is also deleted, and after the setting change, the game is performed in the normal game state. For this reason, if the setting is changed while the low-probability game that is disadvantageous to the player is operating, the low-probability game ends in the middle before the predetermined low-probability game period elapses, and the hall ( Amusement stores) sometimes suffered disadvantages.

Therefore, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, when changing the set value of the ball ejection rate, the main CPU uses the work at address 101 or higher when the second BB operating flag is not "on". It is designed to clear the area. On the other hand, when the second BB operating flag is "on", the work area other than the addresses 101 to 101 and 201 to 205 is cleared. After that, the main CPU updates the set value according to the operation of the reset button, and displays the payout rate set value at that time on the payout number display unit.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-204625

However, in the conventional game machine as described above, the set value related to the payout rate is an element that is directly linked to the sales of the game store, and is an element that the player pays the most attention to. For this reason, there is a problem that someone arbitrarily changes or confirms the set value and enjoys an unreasonable profit. For example, the player may change or confirm the set value by some means in cooperation with a person who is not a hall clerk, or the player may change or confirm the set value in cooperation with a hall clerk who is not authorized to change the setting. There was a problem of enjoying unfair profits by confirming.

Moreover, in spite of the above-mentioned problems, in the conventional game machine, the setting value is changed in order to track that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts such as the so-called goto act have been performed. Not only is there no consideration given to saving and displaying the setting change confirmation information associated with the history and setting value confirmation history, setting value and date and time data, and whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. In order to make a judgment, there is a problem that no consideration is given to saving and displaying the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and since it is possible to save and display the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data, the set value. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can not only judge whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed on the game, but also can judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a display unit that displays various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11), an operation unit that accepts various operations (for example, an enter button 28 and a select button 29). A control unit (for example, the main CPU 93) that controls the game and a display control unit (for example, the sub CPU 102) that controls the display of the display unit are provided, and the control unit has a set value (for example, a setting). Setting means (for example, setting key type switch 52) that enables change or confirmation of 1 to 6) and data transmission means (for example, main CPU 93) that transmits various data (for example, display commands) to the display control unit. ), And the display control unit has a receiving means (for example, a sub CPU 102) for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a storage capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state. A holding storage area (for example, a backup memory 108) and a day clock time means (for example, a real-time clock 109) for measuring the date and time are provided, and the setting means changes or confirms the set value by the data transmission means. It transmits a command corresponding to the display control unit, the display control unit, when the data received by the front Ki受signal means the command corresponding to the change or confirm the setting value, the memory holding stored Operation type information indicating that the set value is changed or confirmed, and date and time data from the day clock hour means indicating the date and time when the set value and the command corresponding to the change or confirmation of the set value are received are set in the area. A setting value storage means (for example, sub CPU 102) that is stored as change confirmation information (for example, setting change confirmation history information) and a setting display that displays the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit. means (e.g., sub-CPU 102) and, wherein the display control unit, when the setting change confirmation information of the memory holding storage area by said setting display section is displayed on the display unit, the setting change confirmation It has a configuration in which date and time data indicating the date and time when the information is displayed on the display unit is stored in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display unit.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation information of the storage retention storage area is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the storage retention storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display unit. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the display control unit acquires the date and time data in which the setting change confirmation information is displayed on the display unit from the sundial time means, and represents the date and time data and the browsing history. The information may be associated and stored.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. It will be possible to identify if it has been done.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the display control unit uses the setting display means to change the setting or confirm the setting of the storage holding storage area, and confirm the setting, and the setting value and the date and time data. When is displayed, the displayed date and time data may be stored in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display unit.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are displayed among the setting change confirmation information, the displayed date and time data is stored and displayed in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed in the section. Therefore, in the state where the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed is selected, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change confirmation information and the display of the setting value and the date / time data, the browsing history Can be displayed, so it can be determined whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

According to the present invention, since the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data can be saved and displayed, it is determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed. Not only can it be possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the front door is opened. It is a top view which shows the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display device in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the front door in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the touch sensor relay circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus operation time table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for a general gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for a bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 3) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small combination / replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for rotating cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular push stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol correspondence winning operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pull-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT state of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and the stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and RT transition in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in occurrence lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the G number addition lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR1 continuous lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BR2 continuous lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition lottery table in BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition A of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition B of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the additional game number lottery table for additional addition C of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 1) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 2) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 3) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 4) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 5) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 6) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (7) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (the 8) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value lottery table (9) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the provisional causal value lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value stock lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub-storage area of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock processing at the start of a game in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change processing after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo-bonus processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of ART pullback processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BR continuation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BR continuation determination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value-related processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the display command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock effect control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the accessory control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch panel control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch panel input editing process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the warning screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the hall menu screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall menu processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the detail of the setting change confirmation history information on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the detail of the setting change confirmation history information on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the detail of the setting change confirmation history information on the setting change / confirmation history screen which displays the setting value of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the confirmation procedure of the setting value in the setting change confirmation history information of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the error information history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the maintenance process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the maintenance screen and touch panel maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation state display table in the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the touch panel maintenance screen which changed the display position of the grid line in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the guide initial image displayed on the main screen and the guide menu screen displayed on a sub screen in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the state which a finger is touching the guide menu "arrangement / payout" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state which a finger is touching the guide menu "start uni-memo" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the uni-memo initial image displayed on the main screen and the uni-memo menu screen displayed on the sub-screen in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen and the password input menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one embodiment of the present invention, and shows the state where a finger is touching the password input menu "E". It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the example of the password display image displayed on the main screen and the password input menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one embodiment of the present invention, and shows the state where a finger is touching the password input menu "F". It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the state which displayed "F" which concerns on the detection of selection in the password display image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the authentication function part applied to the setting change / confirmation history processing in the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process in the setting change / confirmation history process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the key medal insertion request display screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view which shows the key medal insertion request display screen in FIG. 150. It is a figure which shows an example of the authentication NG notification screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the volume switch applied to the authentication process of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process in the setting change / confirmation history process of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume password request display screen of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 156 is an enlarged view showing the volume password request display screen e in FIG. 156. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process in the setting change / confirmation history process of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the numeric keypad display area in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view showing a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 160. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the game machine of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the gaming system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the QR code in the game machine of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view showing a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 166. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the QR code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on 5th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 146.
In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed are calculated. A pachi-slot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which a function in which a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a game state higher than the normal time is operated, is activated at the same time will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. The main control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for this internal lottery means. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols) on the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along. Further, the reel stop control means is specified for one or more reels, for example, when the challenge bonus (CB) which is a second type special accessory and the middle bonus (MB) which continuously operates the CB are operated. Within the time of 75 msec (for one symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. The winning determination means is carried by the main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end portion of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and performs an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying patterns drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, the image is displayed and the effect is executed using the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4.

Hereinafter, the display window 4 is referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. These display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions that overlap with the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and are in front of the three reels (player side). ) Is provided. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R are continuously arranged among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle, and lower regions are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each region. Then, in the present embodiment, the line connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not to win.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9, and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a decorative frame 100 having two panel openings 100a and 100b that expose the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 100. It has a transparent protective cover (not shown) that closes the panel openings 100a and 100b.

The decorative frame 100 has a partition piece 112 that separates the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. The two panel openings 100a and 100b are partitioned by partition pieces 112 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display portion 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 100b of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

The decorative frame 100 is provided with a headlamp 21, a reel lamp 22, a decorative unit 121, and a rotating accessory unit 122. The headlamp 21 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and is arranged above the decorative frame 100. The reel lamp 22 has a group of LEDs, and is arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the decorative frame 100 and in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 turn on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect. The decoration unit 121 is arranged on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decoration frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) (not shown). The decoration unit 121 is lit with a color and a lighting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect when a special effect or a predetermined effect is performed. The rotating accessory unit 122 is arranged on the left side of the panel opening 100a in the decorative frame 100. Further, the rotating accessory unit 122 transmits light through an accessory driving unit 124 (see FIG. 7) including a rotating accessory (gear accessory) 123 (see FIG. 6) and a stepping motor for rotating the rotating accessory 123. It has a property and has a cover member 125 that covers the rotating accessory 123. When a predetermined effect is performed, the rotating accessory 123 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 has various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1 bet button 15, start lever 16, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, select button) to be operated by the player. 29) is provided.

The medal slot 13 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 13 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 14 and the 1-bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R will be referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select an arbitrary item from a plurality of selectable items on various screens (for example, see FIG. 128 described later) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Depending on the pressing (operation) of the select button 29, the position of the cursor for designating one item among the displayed plurality of items and the highlighted item are changed. Further, the designated item is selected in response to the pressing of the enter button 28.

Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). indicate.

A medal payout outlet 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R, and the like are provided at the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 18 guides the medals discharged by driving the medal payout device 43, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 18. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1.

The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side open. A main control board 41 constituting the main control circuit 91 is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main operations of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

Three reels (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R) are provided in the central portion of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one is provided in the lower portion of the cabinet 2a. On the left side of the hopper device 43 (on the left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 44 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided.

Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (on the right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a. The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the cabinet 2a.

An auxiliary control board 42 constituting the auxiliary control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) described later is provided on the upper portion of the front door 2b on the back surface side (the portion opposite to the display screen side). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

Further, a medal selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The medal selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside are appropriate via the medal insertion slot 13, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. .. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 46S (see FIG. 7) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the medal selector 46.

[Display device and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 has a display unit 11a and a frame portion 11b that surrounds the display unit 11a. The display unit 11a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and has the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above. The frame portion 11b is formed in a rectangular frame shape surrounding the four sides of the display portion 11a.

A touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a (the side opposite to the display window 4C). That is, the touch sensor module 31 is arranged at the lower right corner of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31.
As shown in FIG. 5, the touch sensor module 31 is a surface-type capacitance type touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed substrate 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34.

The sensor unit 32 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate. The sensor unit 32 has a rectangular transparent substrate 35, electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, a transparent conductive film, and a protective cover (not shown). Examples of the material of the transparent substrate 35 include glass. The protective cover is made of a transparent material and covers the transparent conductive film and the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c.

The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c are arranged on the outer edge of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

The electrode pattern 36a is formed in an I shape and extends along one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36b is formed in an L shape and extends along one short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. Further, the electrode pattern 36c is formed in an L shape and extends along the other short side and the one long side of the transparent substrate 35. No electrode pattern is formed on the other long side of the transparent substrate 35. That is, no electrode pattern is formed on one side (the other long side) of the sensor unit 32.

The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7). The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit board 33. The touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed circuit board 33.

A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32, and when a finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. As a result, a weak current is generated in the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, 36c, and the current value is output to the touch sensor IC34. The touch sensor IC34 detects that the finger touches the surface 35a, the position where the finger is touching, and the finger is separated based on the current values of the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c.

As shown in FIG. 4, the portion of the electrode patterns 36b and 36c of the touch sensor module 31 along one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and the electrode pattern 36a face the right side piece of the frame portion 11b. Further, the portion of the electrode pattern 36b along one short side of the transparent substrate 35 faces the lower piece of the frame portion 11b.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of the front door 2b as viewed from the front. In FIG. 6, the cover member 125 of the rotating accessory unit 122 is shown transparently.
As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed from the openings 100a and 100b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is arranged on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. As a result, a touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is formed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a.

The electrode patterns 36a and 36b provided on one long side and one short side of the sensor portion 32 (see FIG. 4) of the touch sensor module 31 face the frame portion 11b and are covered with the front panel 10. .. Further, although the electrode pattern 36c does not face the frame portion 11b, it is covered with the front panel 10 (partition piece 112). An electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

As a result, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the region where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the region where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided can be made invisible to the player.
Hereinafter, the area of the display unit (display screen) 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 provided with the touch input unit 31a of the touch sensor module 31 may be referred to as a sub screen 113, and the other areas may be referred to as a main screen 111.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 41 arranged in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 arranged in the front door 2b.
The reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44 are electrically connected to the main control board 41. There is.

The reel relay terminal plate 51 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 51 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

An external centralized terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet-side relay board 53. The cabinet-side relay board 53 relays signals output from the main control board 41 to the external centralized terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external centralized terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet-side relay board 53.

The external centralized terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Since the hopper device 43 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

A power switch 44a is connected to the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

A medal sensor 46S, a door open / close monitoring switch 61, a BET switch 62, a settlement switch 63, a start switch 64, a stop switch board 65, a game operation display board 66, and a sub relay board 67 are connected to the door relay terminal board 54. .. That is, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66, and the sub-relay board 67 are mainly connected via the door relay terminal board 54. It is connected to the control board 41.

The medal sensor 46S detects that the medal has passed through the medal selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The medal sensor 46S is, for example, an optical sensor or the like in which the light between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion is blocked by the inserted medal in the medal passage, but includes a CMOS image sensor or the like capable of imaging either the front or back surface of the medal. It may function as a medal selector capable of classifying a predetermined medal by performing image recognition, feature extraction processing, or the like by an image recognition processor. The door open / close monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 24 and the 1BET button 25 (see FIG. 2) are pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the start lever 26 has been operated by the player (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 65. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 27L, 27C, 27R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 23 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the replay is performed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69, for example, lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub-relay board 67 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 42. That is, the sub-relay board 67 includes a sub-control board 42, a sound board 71, an LED control board 72, a touch sensor relay board 73, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, an accessory control board 78, and an enter switch. The 75 and the select switch 79 are electrically connected.

The sub-control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal board 54 and the sub-relay board 67. Further, the sub-control board 42 includes a sound board 71, an LED control board 72, a touch sensor relay board 73, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74, an accessory control board 78, and an enter via a sub-relay board 67. It is electrically connected to the switch 75 and the select switch 79.

The sound board 71 outputs audio to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED control board 72 lights a headlamp 21 and a reel lamp 22 showing a specific example of a light source according to an effect executed by the control of a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9) to display a lighting pattern. ..

The touch sensor relay board 73 transmits the input information output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub-control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error to the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

The accessory control board 78 controls the drive of the accessory drive unit 124 with the rotation pattern instructed by the sub-control circuit 101 according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), and the accessory control board 78 controls the drive of the accessory drive unit 124. Rotate the object 123.

The enter switch 75 detects that the enter button 28 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67. Further, the select switch 79 detects that the select button 29 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub-control board 42 via the sub-relay board 67.

The ROM cartridge board 76 and the liquid crystal relay board 77 are connected to the sub-control board 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (headlamp 21, reel lamp 22) and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 77 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 41 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 is composed of a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is basically set for four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 27L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to the symbol four ahead of the symbol can be stopped in the middle of the display window 4. It becomes a design.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a GPU (graphic processing unit) 104, a drawing RAM 105, a driver 106, a volume switch 107 (for example, a slide switch, a rotary switch having multiple contacts, etc.), and a backup memory. It includes 108 (for example, SRAM, FRAM (registered trademark), SSD, HDD, flash memory, etc.) and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as RTC) 109.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 76 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 76 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, the drawing control task and the animation control task (see FIG. 123) that control the display of the image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, and the light from the light sources such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22. The lamp control task (see FIG. 121) that controls the output of the rotating accessory 123, the sound control task that controls the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R (see FIG. 122), and the accessory control task that controls the operation of the rotating accessory 123 (FIG. 120), a hall menu task for controlling the hall menu (see FIG. 127), and the like.

Further, the control program includes a setting change / confirmation history process (see FIG. 130), which will be described later, that is, a history of setting change or setting confirmation of a setting value which is an index for distinguishing the degree of advantage for the player. It also includes a process to display the set value.

As the above-mentioned set value, the pachi-slot machine 1 has, for example, a set value of 6 stages of settings 1 to 6 described later for adjusting the payout. The pachi-slot machine 1 can selectively set any one of the settings 1 to 6, and has a function of variably adjusting the probability of ball ejection so as to be a value corresponding to the setting. In pachislot 1, the set values of the above settings 1 to 6 are also used as parameters for variably adjusting the winning probability of replay to a value corresponding to each setting.

In the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 shown in FIG. 9, the volume switch 107, the backup memory 108, and the RTC 109 are components for realizing the above-mentioned setting change / confirmation history processing.

The backup memory 108 stores the setting change confirmation, the setting confirmation, the setting values (settings 1 to 6), and the date and time data as the setting change confirmation history information in association with each other. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the backup memory 108 receives power via the power supply path from the power supply device 44, and operates by receiving power supply from the storage battery of the power supply device 44 even while the power is turned off. .. In the present embodiment, the setting change confirmation history information is associated with the date and time data when the setting value (settings 1 to 6) history information, the setting change history information, and the setting confirmation history information are browsed. Browsing history information is also included. The setting change confirmation history information means the setting change confirmation information according to the present invention.

The RTC109 clocks the date and time (year, month, day and hour, minute, second, day of the week), and outputs date and time data indicating the timed date and time. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the RTC 109 receives power via the power supply path from the power supply device 44, and even while the power is turned off, the RTC 109 receives power from the storage battery of the power supply device 44 and operates. The RTC constitutes the sundial hour means in the present invention.

In the sub control circuit 101, the sub CPU 102 performs an operation of changing the setting of the setting value (settings 1 to 6) being set by the pachislot machine 1, an operation of confirming the setting change, and an operation of viewing the history of the setting change and confirmation. In each case, the date and time data timed by RTC109 is acquired each time. Then, the sub CPU 102 associates each of the above operations with the date and time data acquired at that time, generates history information each time, and converts these history information into a list format setting change confirmation history information (FIG. 133). Refer to) and store it in a predetermined area of the backup memory 108.

The setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 is, for example, information of the contents displayed on the setting change confirmation history screen 116b of FIG. 133, which will be described later. As a mode for storing the setting change confirmation history information, in addition to storing either the setting change and the setting value and the date and time data (setting change history), the setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data (setting confirmation history), the setting There is also a method of storing the change history and the setting confirmation history. When including browsing and date / time data (setting change history), either one of the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history should be stored, or any number of histories should be stored in an appropriate combination. Just do it. Such a combination mode of the setting change confirmation history information is the same for the display of the setting change confirmation history information.
The setting change confirmation history information will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

In the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 shown in FIG. 9, the volume switch 107 sets the volume of the speakers 20L and 20R. For example, in the circuit board of the sub-control board 42 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. It is provided in. As will be described later, the volume switch 107 is a password used for an authentication process (see S1041 in FIG. 148) when displaying setting change confirmation history information in a mode including a set value, specifically, between a plurality of volume positions. It is also used as an input means for a volume password (see S1071 in FIG. 155) based on an operation pattern. Details of the processing related to the volume password will be described later.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the GPU 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the operation of the rotating accessory 123 according to the accessory data specified by the effect content.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 composed of the touch sensor relay board 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151.
As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub-relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines the operation command and the XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and the XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67.

The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153, 154, regulators 155, 156, sub-control receive buffer 157, and sub-control transmit buffer 158. ..

A connector 154, a regulator 155, a sub-control reception buffer 157, and a sub-control transmission buffer 158 are connected to the touch sensor LSI 152. The sub-control receive buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub-control transmit buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub-relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned connector 33a of the touch sensor module 31.

The regulator 155 controls the DC (direct current) 12V power supply supplied via the connector 153 to the DC 3.3V power supply, and outputs the DC (direct current) 12V power supply to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub-control reception buffer 157. Further, the regulator 156 controls the power supply of DC12V supplied via the connector 153 to the power supply of DC5V, and outputs the power supply to the sub-control transmission buffer 158.

The sub-control receive buffer 157 temporarily stores the received data (RXD) transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101 and received by the connector 153. Then, the stored received data is transmitted to the touch sensor LSI 152.

The touch sensor LSI 152 has various operation commands indicating the type of operation for the touch input unit 31a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on the touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. To determine. Further, the XY coordinate data is determined based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

The sub-control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, various operation commands and XY coordinate data are transmitted as transmission data (TXD) to the sub-control circuit 101 via the connector 153.

In the present embodiment, since the touch sensor relay circuit determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor module, the processing related to the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub-control circuit 101 is reduced. Can be done. As a result, the burden on the sub-control circuit 101 when the touch sensor module 31 is mounted can be reduced.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 39.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 11). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, "0" to "20" corresponding to the symbol counters are set as symbol positions in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (arrow A direction in FIG. 11) with reference to the symbol position "0". Assigned to a symbol.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window 4. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4 have the symbol position "9" "9", respectively. The symbols corresponding to "watermelon", "red 7" at the symbol position "8", and "bell 1" at the symbol position "7" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, the display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is judged as a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals and operating the replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is not specified in the symbol combination table, so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "loss" is specified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "loss".

The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination column is data for designating the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In this embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, the display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the number of medals inserted is three, and when any one of "C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP" is determined as the display combination, 13 medals are inserted. Is paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the number of inserted medals is three and any one of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is determined as the display combination, 14 medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E", which are display roles related to replay (replay) as display roles, "C_HOM_A"-"C_HOM_P", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A"-"C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B", "C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_A" , "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C", the replay (replay) is activated.

The display combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG. 15 is a combination that may be displayed when the display combination related to "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" cannot be established (missed). is there. The display combination related to these "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is a display combination that serves as an opportunity when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus activation table]
Next, the bonus operating table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), the bonus end number counter, the game possible number counter, and the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 95 when the bonus is activated. It stipulates.

The game status flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in which the operation is performed. In this embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as the types of bonus games. The middle bonus is a so-called continuous operation device for a special character of the second kind, and is hereinafter referred to as "MB". The challenge bonus is a so-called type 2 special character, and is hereinafter referred to as "CB". The operation of the CB is continuously performed while the operation of the MB is being performed.

The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not the specified number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operation of MB1 and MB2, which is started when the display of "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is triggered, ends when the medals reaching the specified number "13" are paid out.

The playable number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of "CB", that is, the so-called playable number of times. The operation of "CB" ends when one game is played.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

In the present embodiment, five types of RT game states, RT0 game state to RT4 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations of the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the RT game is that the symbol combination related to the predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line (the predetermined display combination is established). It triggers a transition between states.

Specifically, when the display combinations related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_A", "C_CU_REP_A", and "C_CU_REP_B" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state to RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combinations related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", and "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" are established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. To do. In this case, the transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of RT0 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state.

Further, when the display combination related to "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Then, when the display combination related to "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. The transition source (RT gaming state before the transition) in this case is any one of the RT1 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table. A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 53.

[Internal lottery table decision table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence between the game state, the number of medals inserted, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery.

Specifically, in the general gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used, and "42" is set as the number of lottery. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) game state, all the small winning combinations (internal winning combinations related to the payout of medals) are determined as internal winning combinations. That is, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storage area described later are turned on. It also invalidates the winnings of "MB1" and "MB2".

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to be provided with an internal lottery table used in the general gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning numbers in each RT game state and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. ..

The small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) described later. It is the data for designating the internal winning combination.

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the winning number when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur) is won, and the data points assigned to the winning number are acquired.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data to which the lottery value is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table (RT0) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for the general gaming state is a table that is referred to in the RT0 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers 1-42.

In this embodiment, the lottery value is defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided for the game store to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small wins. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a key-type switch for setting (not shown). Is changed using.

For example, with reference to the internal lottery table for the general game state, the probability of winning the winning number "1" (abbreviated as "F_NMLRP1") in setting 6 is 7000/65536. Then, when the winning number "1" is won, "1" is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small role / replay data pointer "1" corresponds to the abbreviations "C_C_REP" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P".

Further, in the internal lottery table for the general game state, the winning numbers "12" (abbreviation "F_R1_R2_KP"), "13" (abbreviation "F_R1_KP_R2"), "19" (abbreviation "F_KP_R4_R2_1") to "22" (abbreviation "F_KP_R2") The lottery value of ") is" 0 ". Therefore, when the internal lottery table for the general game state is referred to, the winning numbers "12", "13", and "19" to "22" are not won.

When the winning numbers "12", "13", "19" to "22" are won, "12", "13", "19" to "22" are acquired as data pointers for small roles / replays. The internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state does not shift to the RT2 gaming state.

In this embodiment, the lottery value is defined according to the settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are changed by using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) connected to the main control board 41 and a setting key type switch 52.
The reset switch (not shown) has six predetermined steps ("1" to "1") as setting values which are indexes for distinguishing the degree of advantage for the player according to the pressing operation of the reset button (not shown). Generates a signal for determining one of the six stages of "6" (that is, setting a set value for selecting a lottery value in the internal lottery table with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23). .. The set value is a value for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a bonus or a small role on the game store side. Further, the setting key type switch 52 generates signals for starting and ending the operation of determining the set value in response to the setting key managed by the game store being inserted into the setting keyhole (not shown). ..

Based on the signal generated from the reset switch (not shown) and the setting key type switch 52, one of the six stages of the set value "1" to the set value "6" is determined as the set value. Therefore, the expected value can be adjusted.

Specifically, when the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and rotated to the right (setting key is ON), a signal is generated from the setting key type switch 52, and the 7-segment display 23 described later The current setting value is displayed in. Then, when the reset button is pressed, a signal is generated from the reset switch (not shown), and the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 23 increases or decreases in the range of "1" to "6". Then, when the start lever 16 is operated when the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 23 reaches a desired set value, the displayed set value is determined as the set value. After that, when the setting key is rotated to the left (setting key OFF state), the player can operate with the determined set value. The original function of the reset switch (not shown) is that when an abnormality occurs in the pachislot machine 1, the cause of the abnormality is removed, and then the reset switch (not shown) is pressed to perform an abnormality in the pachislot machine 1. It is provided to perform operations to remove the condition.

FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "19" and "21" are "3750", respectively. As described above, when any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "19" to "22" specified according to the winning numbers "19" to "22" is acquired, "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" The internal winning combination related to the above is decided. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "14" and "16" are "10000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "15" and "17" are "6000", respectively. Is. The lottery value of the winning number "18" is "10846".

When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "14" to "18" specified according to the winning numbers "14" to "18" is acquired, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to The internal winning combination related to "C_SBB_D" is determined (see FIG. 25). Therefore, in the case of the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" is determined, and the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state. There is.

FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers "20" and "22" are "5000", respectively, and the lottery values of the winning numbers "23" and "24" are "8000", respectively. Is. When any of the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20", "22" to "24" specified according to the winning numbers "20", "22" to "24" is acquired, "C_small" The internal winning combination related to "V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" is determined (see FIG. 26). Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT4 gaming state. ..

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "20" and "22" specified according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. The internal lottery table for the RT4 game state is a table referred to in the RT4 game state, and the lottery value and the data pointer are defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". In the case of the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number of the internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. It is changed to the lottery value specified according to "1" to "24".

For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "12" and "13" are "13000", respectively. When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" is determined. To. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state.

In addition, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers "12" and "13" specified according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" is assigned. It is determined. Therefore, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

The winning numbers "28" to "33" in the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any of the gaming states of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and the lottery value is Each is "2930". When the small winning combination / replay data pointers "28" to "33" specified according to the winning numbers "28" to "33" are acquired, the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is determined. To.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination related to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" is determined in any of the gaming states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state may shift to the RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, which allows display along the effective line. The "internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and is a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Combinations are assigned. The "○" mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the winning internal winning combination in the acquired data pointer.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are "0", the content of the "internal winning combination" is "missing", which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to "1" of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when "1" is acquired as a bonus data pointer, "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are won as internal winning combinations.

25 to 28 show an internal winning combination determination table for small combination / replay. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination related to the replay (replay) for the small combination / replay data pointers "1" to "42". That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

For example, when "17" is acquired as a data pointer for a small role / replay, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_C_REP", "C_Koyama_REP_A" to "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning combinations. _REP_F "is duplicated. In addition, when "18" is acquired as a small role / replay data pointer, "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", and "C_Koyama" are used as internal winning roles. "_REP_A" to "C_Koyama_REP_F" and "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" are duplicated.

[Number selection table for stopping rotation]
Next, the number selection table for stopping the rotation of the cylinder will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The reel stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

The rotating cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotating cylinder stop number for each data pointer. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. When the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "67" is selected.

1 of the US mark in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB game state (CB game state), and the small role / replay data pointers are “0” and “25 to 41”. Show the case. In this case, the rotation stop number "42" is selected. Further, 1 and 2 of the rice marks in the number selection table for stopping the rotation shown in FIG. 29 indicate a case where the MB game state (CB game state) is in progress. For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "1" during the MB game state, the rotation stop number "43" is selected.

The rotation cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines different rotation rotation stop numbers for each small combination / replay data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the rotation rotation stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotation rotation stop number may be specified for different small winning combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initialization table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority table selection process described later and the determination process of the number of sliding pieces of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation cylinder stop number, a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push. The correspondence between the initial table change data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is specified.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the reel stop number is specified in the reel stop initial setting table, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number specified in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 37). Data related to the priority of the display combination can be acquired.

If the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is not specified in the reel stop initial setting table, the pull-in priority table selection table is selected by referring to the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 36). The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

The forward-pressed table selection data, forward-pressed table change data, and forward-pressed table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be referred to when forward-pressed. It is data. The "forward push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed on the left reel 3L, and specifically, "left middle". Corresponds to the push order (stop order) of "right" and "left and right middle". Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when either the display on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound output from the speakers 20L or 20R, or the push order (stop order) performed by combining these is not notified, the notification is not performed. , Stop operation by pressing forward is recommended.

The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 35) to be referred to when an irregular pressing is performed. The "irregular push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is a "middle left / right", "middle right / left", and "right middle". Corresponds to the pressing order of "left" and "right, left, middle".

In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is started to be stopped, and this is referred to as a "stop start position".

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch 17S to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

With reference to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel.

Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as "sliding piece number determination data"), the pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 37). Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of forward pressing, the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 32) and the second and third stop tables for forward pressing (see FIG. 34) are referred to. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the stop table at the time of irregular pressing (see FIG. 35) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing will be described. The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is "01". The stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence between the stop start positions "0" to "20" of the left reel 3L and the slip piece number determination data and the change status.

For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the slip piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to the forward press control change table (see FIG. 33), which will be described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the control change table at the time of forward pressing will be described with reference to FIG. 33. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the position where the left reel 3L is scheduled to stop), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward push.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the stop table for the first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 32) is "1" and the scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is "15". It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12".
If the change status and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward push are not registered in the target position in the control change table at the time of forward push, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity define 1 byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions "0" to "20".

The second and third stop tables for forward pressing shown in FIG. 34 are referred to when the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing are "08". Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is "07".

Is the stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity appropriate as the position where the symbol position associated with itself stops the rotation of the reel? Has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data provides information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the "A line" column in each stop table, and the "B line" column. Assign to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by allocating information on which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bits corresponding to the "line change" column in each stop table.

That is, the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity specify a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the rotation of the reel is stopped can be changed based on the stop position at the time of the first stop or the like. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The data for determining the number of sliding pieces is determined as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is specified.

Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether or not "1" is specified as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

Whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is determined to change the line, the column of "B line" is specified thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the stop button pressing order and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 37).

When the left reel 3L is first stopped, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "1", "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number. Then, even when the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop and the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, "00" is maintained as the pull-in priority table number.

If the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position in the pull-in priority table selection table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Is obtained as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the attraction priority table selection table number is "0", the attraction priority table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the column on the right side of the column of the first stop of the right reel corresponding to the attraction priority table selection table number "0" is referred to, and "00" is acquired as the attraction priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the pull-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. 37. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type in each of the pull-in priority table numbers "00" to "04" and the predetermined priority.

The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each of the pull-in data is the same as the "internal winning combination" in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and the "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. It is represented by byte data, and a unique combination of symbols is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned stop table for first stop at the time of forward pressing (see FIG. 32). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that are allowed to be stopped by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

In the present embodiment, the stop display (pull-in) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a higher priority has priority over the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having a lower priority. It is done in.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different depending on the attraction priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions is different. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are "01", "03", and "04", the number of priority divisions is set to 3, and the pull-in priority table numbers are "00" and "02". In the case of, the number of priority divisions is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is "01" will be described, and the description of the priority in the other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "1" includes "C_BAR_A", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8", and "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3". The pull-in data corresponding to is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "2" corresponds to "C_BAR_B", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_C", and "C_B_REP_H" to "C_B_REP_J". Data is specified.

When the pull-in priority table number is "01", the priority "3" includes "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H", "C_BAR_C" to "C_BAR_E", "C_B_REP_D" to "C_B_REP_G", and "C_B_REP_K". ~ The pull-in data corresponding to "C_B_REP_P" is specified.

[Search order table]
Next, the search sequence table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The search order table is an order in which the number of sliding pieces is preferentially applied from a predetermined numerical range (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4) (hereinafter, “search order”). ") Is specified.

The search order table defines the slip piece number determination data obtained based on the above-mentioned stop table and the search order thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be applied preferentially is determined based on the number of sliding pieces determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply the one having a higher search order.

In this embodiment, as described in the priority pull-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table, and corresponds to the search order “1”. Priority is given to the number of sliding pieces from the numerical value to be applied.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the game lock win according to the winning number related to the internal lottery during the RT4 game state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (pressing operation on the start lever 16) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is drawn, and when the generation of the game lock is determined, the game lock is generated. While the game lock is occurring, even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is subtracted by a predetermined lottery value. .. And. The lottery is performed by determining whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). In other words, it means that the game lock is won when the result of the subtraction is less than 0.

In the game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the lottery value that the game lock wins when the winning numbers are "36" (abbreviation "F_strong angle check") to "41" (abbreviation "F_reach eyes"). To specify. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning numbers are "33" to "41", whether or not to execute the game lock is drawn. For example, when the winning number is "37" (abbreviated as "F_middle stage check"), the game lock is won (executed) with a probability of 32768/65536.

[Prize winning operation flag data table for symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described.
The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

For example, when the symbol "rip" is stopped and displayed on the winning judgment line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (rip) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically producted and stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) described later.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. Although description is omitted here (not shown), a storage area for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in the above-mentioned various reel effects is also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data.

In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 26, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when it is stored), the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the valid line. Is shown. On the other hand, when all the bits are "0", it indicates that the combination of symbols related to the winning is not displayed on the valid line.

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storage area (not shown). The internal winning combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the display combination storage area shown in FIG. 41. When "1" is set in a plurality of bits in the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 26, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Further, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "missing".

Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carry-over combination storage area (not shown). When "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "Rip"-"Rip"-"Bell 2" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the winning judgment line. Is held in. Then, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 42.
Each of the game state flag storage areas is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

When "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit in each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Is shown. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, the MB ("C_MB1" or "C_MB2") is being operated, and the game state is in the MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
The press order storage area stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 45. In the symbol code storage area, the symbol code of the reel that has been stopped most recently (symbol code storage area 1) and the displayable combination (symbol code storage area 2-29) are stored for each effective line. Reel. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the winning operation flag is read. The data is logically producted with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically stacked data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 45. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Pull-in priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a pull-in priority data storage area for the left reel, a pull-in priority data storage area for the middle reel, and a pull-in priority data storage area for the right reel. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel.

In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "20" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The content of the attraction priority data stored in the attraction priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the attraction priority table number in the attraction priority table (see FIG. 37) referred to when determining the attraction priority data. .. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 38).

Although detailed description is omitted in this specification, various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various production operations are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, and various types necessary for the sub RAM 103. A storage area is appropriately provided.

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the transition flow of the gaming state between the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT3 gaming state” and the “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of gaming states of "RT0 gaming state" to "RT4 gaming state" are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition between the “RT0 gaming state” and the “RT4 gaming state” with reference to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17).

First, at the time of shipment, the gaming state is "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the "RT0 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state". Also, in the "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state", or "RT4 game state", when the combination of symbols related to "bell spilled eyes" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is "RT1 game state". To move to.
The "bell spilled eyes" in the present embodiment serve as indicators for "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG.

Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT1 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip A" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order rip A” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” shown in FIG.

In the "RT1 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state". Further, in the "RT3 game state" or the "RT4 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT2 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip B” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” shown in FIG.

In the "RT2 game state", when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT3 game state".
The “BB / RB lip” in the present embodiment serves as a display for “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG.

In the "RT3 game state", when the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state". Further, in the "RT1 game state" or the "RT2 game state", the game state shifts to the "RT4 game state" even when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “pushing order lip C” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” shown in FIG.

In "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state" or "RT4 game state", if the combination of symbols related to the "lower bell" is displayed on the winning judgment line, the game state is "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", "RT3 game state" or "RT4 game state". It shifts to "RT0 game state".
The "lower bell" in the present embodiment serves as a display for "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed when the player is in the "RT3 game state", and the second ART is executed when the player is in the "RT4 game state". The "RT3 gaming state" shifts when the display combinations of "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D" are established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS_A" is "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". That is, a combination of symbols based on the number "7", which is usually adopted as a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus (in addition, a design having better visibility than other symbols may be used) is used. When the stop display is displayed, the gaming state shifts to the "RT3 gaming state", and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as a "pseudo-bonus".

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the RT1 game state, the stop order (display assistance) for displaying the combination of symbols related to the "push order lip B" on the winning determination line. Information) is notified, and it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip B" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip B" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT1 gaming state" to the "RT2 gaming state".

Then, in the "RT2 game state", the display auxiliary information for displaying the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" on the winning determination line is notified. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the "RT2 gaming state" to the "RT3 gaming state". As a result, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the second ART is determined in the "RT1 game state", "RT2 game state", or "RT3 game state", the symbol related to "push order lip C" is used. Notify the stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning judgment line. Then, it waits for the combination of symbols related to "pushing order lip C" to be displayed on the winning determination line. After that, when the combination of the symbols related to the "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the "RT4 gaming state". As a result, the second ART (pseudo-bonus) is executed.

[Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described.
FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, and shows the types of display combinations according to the stop order.

“C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. Then, "C_CD_REP" indicates a display combination ("C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") in which the transition to the RT2 gaming state is determined. Further, the “normal rip” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to the re-game that is not related to the transition of the game state.

Further, "C_BNS" indicates a display combination ("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z") in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. As for "C_BNS * 1", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_A" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T" are not displayed. Further, in "C_BNS * 2", when the stop control using the stop table is performed, "C_BNS_O" is most likely to be displayed, and "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_N" and "C_BNS_U" to "C_BNS_Z" are not displayed.

“C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which the transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. Then, "C_small V" indicates a display combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") in which the transition to the RT4 gaming state (second ART) is determined.

“C_3_BEL” indicates a display combination (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) not related to the transition of the gaming state. When "C_3_BEL" is established, three medals are paid out. Similar to "C_3_BEL", "C_9_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") that is not related to the transition of the gaming state. If "C_9_BEL" is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

“C_ONE” indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which the transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

Further, "C_13_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP") not related to the transition of the gaming state, and "C_14_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL"" not related to the transition of the gaming state. C_14_BEL_K ") is shown. When "C_13_BEL" is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when "C_14_BEL" is established, 14 medals are paid out.

During the MB game state, either "C_13_BEL" or "C_14_BEL" can be established, and the process ends when more than 13 medals are paid out. For example, when "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game in the MB game state, the MB game state ends in that game. As a result, the player acquires 11 medals (14 (payout number) -3 (insertion number) = 11 (acquisition number)).

On the other hand, when "C_13_BEL" is established in the first game and "C_14_BEL" is established in the second game during the MB game state, the player has 21 cards (27 (payout number) -6 (input number) = 21 ( The number of medals won)) can be won. In the MB game state, the winning numbers "1" (rotation stop number "43"), "4" (rotation stop number "46"), "19" (rotation stop number "61") , "21" (rotation stop number "63") is determined, "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game.

In the present embodiment, the stop display of the combination of various symbols related to the replay such as "C_CU_REP" and "C_CD_REP", and the combination of various symbols related to "bell" such as "C_ONE", "C_3_BEL" and "C_9_BEL" The push order (stop order) is set for each success or failure of the stop display.

For example, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", the internal winning combination is "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B" and "C_CU_REP_B". "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "12" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_CU_REP" (either "C_CU_REP_A" or "C_CU_REP_B"), provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle"). The combination of symbols related to is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_CD_REP" (any of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to "normal rip" (any of "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Will be done.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "14", the internal winning wins are "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T", "C_BNS_Y", and "C_C_REP". , "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_F" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "14", "14" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "normal rip"("C_C_REP","C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P"", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". The combination of symbols related to any of) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to any of "C_BNS * 1"("C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_Y") is stopped on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" and "left and right middle". Is displayed.
If the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), any of "C_BNS * 2"("C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T"). The combination of symbols related to () is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the stop operation is not a predetermined timing (correct answer), the combination of symbols related to "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" is stopped and displayed.

In the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", the internal winning combination is "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_B1" to "C_3_B1". , "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_3_BEL_C4", "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" win. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "25" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_3_BEL"("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", provided that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". ~ "C_3_BEL_B8", "C_3_BEL_C1" ~ "C_3_BEL_C4")) The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.
Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", the internal winning combination is "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_CHN_A", "C_ONE_A". ~ "C_ONE_E" wins. Further, in the non-MB game state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", "28" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, if the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). , "C_3_BEL" (any of "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4") is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "C_HAZ" ("C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H") The combination of symbols related to (any of)) is stopped and displayed. As a result, medals are not paid out.

Therefore, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" and the stop button pressing timing is a predetermined timing (correct answer), three medals are paid out. If the timing of pressing the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

Further, on the condition that the stop order is "middle left / right" and "middle right / left", the combination of symbols related to "C_9_BEL" (any of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed. As a result, nine medals will be paid out.
Further, the combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 49 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT shift, and shows the shift destination of the RT game state according to the stop order.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "12", the symbol related to "normal lip" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT game state is not changed.

For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), if the end of the RT4 gaming state has not been determined, a notification that the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" (display auxiliary information) is notified. To do. As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. That is, in order not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (second ART) to another RT gaming state, it is notified that the stop order should be set to "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small combination / replay is "14", it is set to "C_BNS (* 1)" on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". The combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "BB flag" or "BB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is BB.

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "RB flag" or "RB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "right left middle" or "right middle". Notifies that it is good to set it to "left" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB), the stop order should be "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is RB.

In the non-MB game state, when the data pointer for small win / replay is "18", the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is provided on the condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle". Is stopped and displayed. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" described later is on, the stop order is set to "left middle right" or "left and right". Notifies that it is good to set it to "medium" and that it is good to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), the stop order should be "left middle right" or "left and right middle", and "white 7"- Notifies that it is good to aim at the stop display of the combination of "white 7"-"white 7" symbols.

On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 game state (execution of the first ART) is determined and the "SBB flag" or "SBB preparing flag" is off, the stop order is changed to "middle left / right" or "middle right / left". Then, it notifies that it is good (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT game state is not changed. That is, in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB), it is notified that the stop order should be "middle left / right" or "middle right / left".

<Explanation of sub-game state>
Here, the sub-game state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In the present embodiment, as the sub-game state, the general state, CZ (chance zone), the first ART (pseudo-bonus), the second ART, and the preparation for ART (the second ART is started after the end of the first ART). (From the end of the first ART to the start of the second ART), BR (battle rush), and between the flags are set.

When the second ART (ART) is won by the ART lottery performed during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART"), after the end of the first ART, the first 2 ART is started. During the preparation for ART, it is a gaming period until the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) after the end of the first ART shifts to the RT4 gaming state in order to start the second ART. Specifically, when the display combination related to the unique internal winning combination ("C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C") is established during the ART preparation, the ART preparation is completed and the second ART is completed. Is started.

[General state]
The general state is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state, the RT1 game state, and the RT2 game state. During this general state, basically, for each game (game), a lottery (CZ lottery) for whether or not to shift to CZ is performed with reference to the CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50) described later. It is said. Then, when the transition to CZ is decided, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of precursor games of CZ").

As the pachislot machine of the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which the number of precursor games until the transition to CZ is drawn at the same time as the lottery for whether or not to shift to CZ. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ and the number of CZ precursor games when shifting to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub-game state executed during the RT0 game state and the RT1 game state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state and the games of the number of CZ precursor games are digested, the sub-game state is shifted from the general state to CZ. Then, after shifting to CZ, a notification that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") (hereinafter referred to as "navigation aiming at black BAR"). When is performed a specified number of times, CZ ends.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed during CZ, the execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are exhausted before the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed a predetermined number of times, the execution of the first ART is determined.

In this embodiment, "CZ1" and "CZ2" are provided as CZs. In "CZ1", "4" is set as a specified number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ1" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed four times. On the other hand, in "CZ2", "10" is set as a predetermined number of times to perform "navigation aiming at black BAR". That is, the "CZ2" ends when the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" is performed 10 times. The number of times the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" of "CZ1" and "CZ2" is performed is managed by the cut-in number counter during CZ.

In "CZ1" and "CZ2", when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at black BAR" is the same. In addition, the probability of executing "navigation aiming at the black BAR" when a specific internal winning combination is not determined as the internal winning combination is also the same. Therefore, "CZ2", which has a large number of specified times for "navigation aiming at black BAR", has a higher probability that the execution of the first ART is decided than "CZ1".

In addition, "CZ2" may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in the bonus lottery than "CZ1". Further, as the "CZ2" according to the game machine of the present invention, for example, the probability that a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") may be won may be higher than that of the "CZ1".

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state, which is a so-called pseudo-bonus. For example, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined when a bonus is won by a bonus lottery during a general state, CZ, first ART, and second ART. Further, it is determined when the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is stopped and displayed in CZ.

Further, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games predetermined by lottery is exhausted after the end of the first ART. The number of games predetermined by the lottery is set in the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game played after the end of the first ART. Then, when the bonus winning game number counter becomes "0", the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined.

When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if the bonus is won by the bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game counter becomes "0", or if the bonus winning is decided during CZ, the number of bonus winning games is newly decided by the lottery. Will be done.

The first ART (pseudo-bonus) is divided into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

The number of staying games (hereinafter, "the number of first ART start G (games)") is different between RB, BB, and SBB. In the present embodiment, the number of first ART start Gs when the type of pseudo bonus is RB is determined to be "30". Further, the number of first ART start Gs in the case of BB is determined to be "60", and the number of first ART start Gs in the case of SBB is determined to be "100".

The "first ART start G number" determined according to the type of the pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). The first ART (pseudo-bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes "0".

The first ART is started after the games of the first ART precursor games number determined by lottery are digested and the games being prepared are passed. In the first ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) has been won is performed. Then, when the first ART is won and the type is BB or SBB, the game during the preparation for BB is performed after the first ART precursor game is completed. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, the game during the preparation for RB is performed after the end of the first ART precursor game.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS (* 1)" (combination of symbols reminiscent of BB) is stopped. The stop order for displaying is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is BB is started.

In the game during BB preparation in which the determined pseudo-bonus type is SBB, the combination of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is stopped and displayed. The stop order of is notified. Further, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "18", the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_SBB" (combination of symbols reminiscent of SBB) is notified. Will be done. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is SBB is started.

In the RB preparing game, the stop order for displaying the combination stop display of the symbols related to the transition to the RT2 game state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 game state (“normal rip”) is notified. When the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is "14" to "17", the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_BNS * 2" (combination of symbols reminiscent of RB) is stopped and displayed. The stop order for is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

In the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "25" in the first ART, that is, the rotation stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. At that time, the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed is notified so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed and nine medals are paid out. In the case of the non-MB gaming state, when the sub-gaming state is in the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed. Is not notified. Therefore, when the player performs the stop operation by pressing forward ("left middle right" or "left and right middle") recommended in the general state, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_3_BEL" is displayed, and three cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. Therefore, a player who performs a stop operation according to the stop order notified during the first ART can obtain more medals than during the general state.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT4 game state. For example, the second ART is performed by ART lottery during the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART") which is started by winning other than during the second ART. Determined when ART wins. When the winning of the second ART is determined, "50" is determined as the number of games staying in the second ART (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the number of G (games) starting the second ART"). .. "50", which is the "second ART start G number", is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game in the second ART.

The second ART is started after the games of the number of the second ART precursor games determined by the lottery are digested and the games in preparation for ART are passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the second ART is won is performed. Then, if the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is completed.

In the ART preparation game, the stop order for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned "C_small V" is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_Small V" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

In the second ART, as in the first ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "25" in the second ART, that is, the rotation stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. At that time, the stop order (“middle left / right” or “middle right / left”) in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination “C_9_BEL” is displayed is notified so that a relatively large number of medals are paid out. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed and nine medals are paid out. In the case of the non-MB game state, when the sub-game state is in the general state and the winning number related to the internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed. Is not notified. Therefore, the player who performs the stop operation according to the stop order notified during the second ART can obtain more medals than during the general state.

Further, in the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is the winning number corresponding to the internal winning role related to the transition or maintenance of the RT state, for example, "C_CU_REP", "C_CD_REP", "normal rip", etc. , The player may be notified of the push order in order to shift from the RT4 state to another RT state or maintain the RT4 gaming state. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number related to the internal winning is "12" in the second ART, that is, when the rotating cylinder stop number "12" (see FIG. 48) is selected. In addition, when the RT4 state is maintained, the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "normal lip" is displayed (that is, "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left") is notified. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the combination of symbols related to the "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 game state is maintained.

In the second ART, if the winning number related to the internal winning is not a predetermined winning number, the stop order is not notified. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning numbers related to the internal winnings are "34" to "42" during the second ART, the stop order is not notified.

Further, in the second ART, the number of additional games is drawn (lottery for the number of additional games) by referring to the number of additional games lottery table (not shown) for each game (game), and the determined number of additional games is the number of ART games. Add to the counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games increases, and the second ART, which is advantageous for the player, can be continued for a long time.

When the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0", the ART pullback process is performed. In the ART pullback process, a so-called pullback is performed in which "50" is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability. This predetermined probability can be arbitrarily set, but is set to 1% or less in the present embodiment.

In the game that is performed after the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process and before the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, the stop operation is performed by pressing forward ("left middle right" and "left and right middle"). As long as it is done, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted. After the pullback is performed, the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the predetermined winning number (see FIGS. 29 and 48) for which the stop order is notified is won. To. Even if the game does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter, the number of additional games is drawn.

In addition, in the game performed after the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process and before the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, if the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push, the stop operation is performed. The value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the game following the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
BR (battle rush) is a sub-game state related to an effect in which the number of ART games is expected to be added (added), and is executed during the second ART. The lottery for whether or not to execute this BR is for each game during BB (hereinafter referred to as "BB during ART") in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) started by winning during the second ART. Is done in. In addition, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted during the period during which BR is being executed.

In BR, a BR continuation lottery is performed every predetermined number of games (“10” in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is decided, an additional G (game) number lottery is drawn to draw an additional (additional) number of ART games. Do. The number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is notified in the last (10th game) game of the predetermined number of games. Further, the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter.

Further, when the number of times BR continuation is determined (BR continuation number) satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in this embodiment), the additional G number An additional G (game) number lottery, which is different from the lottery, is performed.

There are five types of additional G number lottery according to the present embodiment: "additional addition A", "additional addition B", "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3". When the additional G number lottery is performed, the type of the additional G number lottery is determined by the additional G number lottery during BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional G number lottery.

The number of additional games to be added by the additional G number lottery is determined and notified by a special number of games (“2” in the present embodiment) that is performed after the predetermined number of games is completed. Further, the number of additional games determined by the additional G number lottery is added to the number of additional games counter. When the game of the special number of games is completed, the game of the predetermined number of games is started, and if the BR continuation is decided, the determined number of additional games is notified in the last game of the predetermined number of games. To.

In this way, in BR, when the number of ART games to be added (added) is determined, there is an opportunity for the next number of ART games to be added after the predetermined number of games. As a result, the interest in determining the addition of the number of ART games can be continued, and the interest in the game can be improved for a long period of time.

In addition, in a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect in which the addition of the number of ART games is expected to be continuous. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery in the games of the predetermined number of games. That is, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery by using the continuous effect performed over a plurality of games. As a result, even if the game in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is not determined continues, the interest of the game can be prevented from deteriorating.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is decided exceeds the specified number (“20” in this embodiment), as a benefit, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) win and BR (battle) The start of the rush) is decided. As a result, the result of the continuous lottery can include an expectation other than the addition of the number of additional games, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined satisfies a specific number (n times (n = 1, 2, 3 ...) Of "5" in the present embodiment), an additional G number lottery is drawn. Another additional G number lottery is performed. As a result, the value of the number of additional games may increase due to the continuous continuation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Between flags]
This is a sub-game state in which a pseudo bonus (first ART) is won, the BB precursor flag described later is on, and the first ART precursor game is 0.

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, the CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is the general state. This CZ lottery table shows the correspondence between the winning contents of the CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 50, when the CZ lottery is performed with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be "no win". For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), there is a probability of 32718/32768 that there is no winning, and a probability of 50/32768 that it is "CZ2 winning".

[CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table]
Next, the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 51. The cut-in additional lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This cut-in additional lottery table in CZ shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of addition of a specified number of times and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the cut-in additional lottery using the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1 addition to the specified number of times" is always determined, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In that case, "1 addition to the specified number of times" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. When "1 is added to the specified number of times" is determined, "1" is added to the value of the cut-in number counter during CZ. As a result, the number of times of performing "navigation aiming at black BAR" in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for generating cut-in in CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 52. The cut-in occurrence lottery table during CZ is referred to when the sub-game state is in CZ. This CZ medium cut-in occurrence lottery table shows the lottery values set according to the presence or absence of the loss cut-in occurrence when the result of the internal lottery is “loss”.

In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is "loss", "loss cut-in occurrence" is determined with a probability of 10000/32768. The lost cut-in is a "navigation aiming at the black BAR" performed when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") does not win. In "Navigation aiming at black BAR", it is notified that it is good to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") and the stop order (right middle left) in that case. To do. When the loss cut-in is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is not stopped and displayed.
Even when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is winning, "Navigation aiming at black BAR" is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, the bonus lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 53. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub-game state is in the general state or in the second ART. This bonus lottery table shows the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated as "F_strong bell"), the "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated as "F_watermelon"). If, the "bonus win" is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the "bonus winning" is determined, the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started after the first ART precursor game and the preparing game corresponding to various bonuses.

The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 shows a bonus lottery table for a low probability in which the probability that the "bonus win" is determined is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table for high probability is provided, which has a higher probability that a "bonus win" is determined than a bonus lottery table for low probability. In the present embodiment, the bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to the types of a plurality of modes described later.

[Lottery table with additional G number in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a lottery table for adding the number of G in BB will be described. The G number addition lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB in the first ART. The lottery table for adding the number of Gs in the BB shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the BB medium G number addition lottery using the BB medium G number addition lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "20G" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviation "F_watermelon"). In some cases, "10G" is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the G (game) number such as "10G" or "20G" is determined, the determined G number is added to the BB medium-high probability counter.

[ART lottery table in BB]
Next, the ART lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The ART lottery table in BB shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when it is in BB during non-ART and is in a high probability state described later. This ART lottery table in BB is the second when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). The lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the winning of ART is shown.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the non-ART BB and in a high probability state, the "ART winning" is always determined when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination. This "ART winning" means that the winning of the second ART has been decided. When the "ART winning" is determined, the second ART is started after the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BR lottery table in BB]
Next, the BR lottery table in BB will be described with reference to FIG. 56. The BR lottery table in BB is referred to when it is in BB during ART and is in a high probability state. The BR lottery table in BB is a BR winning combination when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). Indicates the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of.

In the BR lottery using the BR lottery table in BB, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the BB during ART and in a high probability state, when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, there is a probability of 16384/32768 "Battle Rush (BR) 1". "Winning" is decided, and "Battle Rush (BR) 2 winning" is decided with a probability of 3276/32768. "BR2" has a higher probability of winning "BR continuation" in the continuous lottery than "BR1". The determined "BR1" or "BR2" is started after the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is completed.

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, the BR continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when it is in BR1. Further, the BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when it is in BR2. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table show lottery values set according to the presence or absence of BR continuation.

In the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected as the lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuous lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, "BR continuation" is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional extra lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the additional lottery table added during BR will be described. The additional lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional lottery table added during BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the number of continuations of BR.

In the additional addition lottery using the additional addition lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from the predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the number of continuations of BR is "5" (BR5th station), "additional addition A" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "additional addition B" is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. .. Further, the "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, the "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and the "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[Additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR will be described. The additional addition and promotion lottery table during BR is referred to when it is during BR. The additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR shows the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the additional addition and promotion lottery using the additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR, first, the random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is set. The lottery value specified according to the lottery result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 25768 / 32768, and "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Will be done. In addition, "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. If it has already been decided to perform the additional additional lottery, the additional additional lottery during BR and the promotion lottery table are used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to promote to the higher additional additional lottery.

It should be noted that the higher-ranked additional additional lottery has a higher expectation (probability) that the value of the number of additional games to be determined will be larger than that of the lower-ranked additional additional lottery. In the present embodiment, "additional addition B" is higher than "additional addition A", and "additional addition C1", "additional addition C2", and "additional addition C3" are higher than "additional addition B". Further, the "additional addition C2" is higher than the "additional addition C1", and the "additional addition C3" is higher than the "additional addition C2".

[Additional addition A addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the additional addition A addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional A is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional A" is performed in BR. This additional addition A addition G number lottery table shows the addition G number and the lottery value set according to the addition G number.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, "10" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 12568/32768, and as the "additional game number" with a probability of 13000/32768. "20" is determined. Further, "100" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "200" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the determined value of the "additional game number" is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional addition B addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the additional addition B addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional additional B is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional B" is performed in BR. The additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the stop operation.

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table is performed every time a stop operation is detected. The “1 on” column shown in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (first stop operation is performed) is performed. Further, the column of "2on_before +10" is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the first stop operation. To. Then, the column of "3on_before +10" is referred to when the third stop operation (third stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of additional games in the second stop operation. To.

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "1on", "20" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after "20" is determined as the "additional game number" in the first stop operation, the column of "2on_before +20" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "2on_before +20", "30" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after "30" is determined as the "additional game number" in the second stop operation, the column of "3on_before +30" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

For example, in the case of "3on_before +30", "50" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of "100" is acquired as the "number of additional games", and "100" is displayed in the ART game number counter. Will be added.

With reference to the column of "2on_before +20" in FIG. 62, "0" and "10" are not determined as the number of additional games. Further, referring to the column of "2on_before +30" in FIG. 62, "0", "10" and "20" are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the column of "3on_before +50", "0", "10", "20" and "30" are not determined as the number of additional games.

In this way, in the additional G number lottery using the additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the first stop operation, and the third The number of additional games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the additional addition C addition G number lottery table will be described. The additional G number lottery table for the additional C is referred to when the additional G number lottery related to the "additional additional C1", "additional additional C2", or "additional additional C3" is performed in BR. This additional G number additional G number lottery table shows the correspondence between the additional G number and the lottery value set according to the type of additional additional C (C1 to C3).

The additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is performed every time the pressing of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and ends when "0" is determined as the "additional game number" ("0"). No continuation ").

In the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is drawn. The lottery value specified according to the result is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the case of "additional addition C1", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 8918/32768. Further, in the case of "additional addition C2", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, in the case of "additional addition C3", "0" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 2918/32768.

Therefore, the "additional addition C2" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C1", and the "additional additional C3" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery will continue than the "additional additional C2". high.

If the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started when the additional G number lottery using the additional G number lottery table is started, the additional additional C additional G is automatically added. An additional G number lottery is performed using a number lottery table. Then, when "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" in the automatically added G number lottery, the automatic additional G number lottery ends. The automatic addition G number lottery may be provided with an upper limit value (for example, "1000") of the value of the "additional game number" to be determined.

Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, a value other than "0" is determined as the "additional game number", and the start lever 16 is operated in a state where "continuation" is determined. In some cases. In this case, the "number of additional games" determined up to that point is enabled, and the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table is automatically performed. Then, the "number of additional games" determined before the automatically performed additional G number lottery is added to the "additional game number" determined in the automatically performed additional G number lottery, and the additional game is added. C Addition G number Let it be the "additional game number" obtained by the addition G number lottery using the lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. The causal value lottery table is referred to when the causal value lottery is performed by satisfying various conditions. This causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to various conditions.

In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a value called "causal value" is obtained in various situations where the interest of the game is lowered (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, a privilege advantageous to the player is given based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game due to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 1). This causal value lottery table (No. 1) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between rare roles.

The rare roles according to this embodiment are "strong bell" (winning number "27"), "watermelon" (winning number "34"), "weak cherry" (winning number "35"), and "strong cherry" (winning number "35"). The numbers are "36") and "chance eyes" (win numbers "38" to "40"). The "G number between rare roles" is the number of Gs from when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination to when any of the rare roles is determined as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the "G number between rare roles" reaches "50G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.
If the "G number between rare roles" exceeds "200G", a causal value lottery is performed with reference to the "200G" column every time the subsequent "G number between rare roles" increases by 100G.

FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 2). This causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between bonuses. The period between bonuses is the number of Gs from the end of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between bonuses" reaches "200G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 3). This causal value lottery table (No. 3) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between BBs. The BB interval is the number of Gs from the end of the BB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (pseudo-bonus).

For example, when the "G number between BBs" reaches "400G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 4). This causal value lottery table (No. 4) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between ARTs. Between ARTs is the number of Gs from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

For example, when the "G number between ARTs" reaches "500G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 5). This causal value lottery table (No. 5) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive RBs. The number of consecutive RBs is the number of times that RBs are continuously drawn as a type of pseudo-bonus when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by the RB continuous counter.

For example, when the "continuous number of RBs" is "4", "5" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the RB continuous counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (pseudo-bonus).

FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 6). This causal value lottery table (No. 6) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The number of consecutive CZ failures is the number of consecutive times that "CZ1" and "CZ2" end without determining the first ART (pseudo-bonus). In this embodiment, a column is also provided when the CZ failure is the first time. Further, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by the CZ failure continuous counter.

For example, when the "number of consecutive CZ failures" is "failure_2 consecutive", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined in "CZ1" and "CZ2". The value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started.

FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 7). This causal value lottery table (No. 7) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus.

For example, when the "number of continuous Gs of CZ finished without confirming the bonus" is "4G", "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

“CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the interest of the player is enhanced because the determination of the first ART (pseudo-bonus) can be expected more than in the general game. However, since the end condition of "CZ1" and "CZ2" according to the present embodiment is the number of executions of "navigation aiming at black BAR", there is a possibility that it will end in a short period (small number of games). Therefore, when "CZ1" and "CZ2" are completed in a short period of time, the probability of giving a "causal value" or giving a "causal value" is increased. As a result, even if there is a situation in which the interest of the game in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is lowered, there is a possibility that an advantageous privilege can be obtained after that, and it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game. it can.

FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 8). The causal value lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot machine 1 is changed. This causal value lottery table (No. 8) shows a causal value and a lottery value set according to the causal value.

For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768, and "40" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (No. 9). This causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of Gs digested during the preparation of various pseudo bonuses and ART (second ART). In addition, the number of G digested during preparation is counted by the preparatory digested G number counter.

For example, when the "number of games digested during preparation" reaches "20G", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000 / 32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Further, the value of the preparing digestion G number counter is cleared on condition that various pseudo bonuses or the start of the second ART are started.

[Temporary causal value lottery table]
Next, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development effect fails. This provisional causal value lottery table shows the correspondence between the provisional causal value and the lottery value set according to the type of development effect.

The "development effect" according to the present embodiment is whether or not the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is won or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won by being continuously executed over a plurality of games. It is a production that informs you. Then, "when the development effect fails" is a case where the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is not won in the development effect, or the CZ (chance zone) is not won.

The "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" may be notification of various winnings such as the winning of the second ART (ART). In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (so-called "BB", "MB", etc., which serves as a carry-over role), the bonus is won as "notification that the start of a gaming state advantageous to the player has been decided". Notification of what has been done can be mentioned.

In addition, the time when the "game state advantageous to the player" is started may be from the next game in which the notification is made, and a special condition is satisfied in the game after the notification is made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination related to the bonus) has been decided, and a special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to the start of the bonus) has been stopped and displayed. Can be mentioned.

Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned deterministic notification of various winnings as described above, and is described above. It may be a notification suggesting various kinds of winnings. Further, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has not been determined" according to the gaming machine of the present invention deterministically notifies that the various winnings as described above have not been determined. It may be a notification suggesting that various winnings have not been determined.

In the provisional causal value lottery using the provisional causal value lottery table, first, the random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) are selected according to the lottery result. The lottery value specified in the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, if "development effect 1" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, if the "development effect 4" fails, "3" is determined as the "provisional causal value" with a probability of 3000/32768. The "causal value" is determined based on this "provisional causal value" and the "internal point" described later.

The "development effect 4" has a higher probability of being notified that the start of the gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player, is determined than the "development effect 1". Therefore, in the "development effect 4", if it is notified that the start of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player has not been decided, the player's dissatisfaction will increase, but the advantageous privilege will be given later. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Internal point lottery table]
Next, the internal point lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. The internal point lottery table is referred to when performing an internal point lottery. Then, the internal point lottery is performed in each game. This internal point lottery table shows the correspondence between the internal points and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

In the internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined according to the lottery result. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when the winning number is "27" (abbreviation "F_strong bell"), "1" is determined as the "internal point" with a probability of 512/32768, and the "internal point" has a probability of 265/32768. "3" is determined as. The determined "internal point" is added to the internal point counter.

The value of the internal point counter is the maximum value of the "causal value" determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "10". In this case, since "10" is guaranteed as the maximum value of the "causal value", "5" of the "provisional causal value" is determined as the "causal value".

On the other hand, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "3". In this case, since "3" is guaranteed as the maximum value of "causal value", "5" of "provisional causal value" is not determined as "causal value" as it is, and internal points acquired so far. "3", which is the same value as, is determined as a "causal value".
If the development effect fails and the "causal value" is determined, the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal value stock consumption lottery table]
Next, the causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when giving a player a favorable privilege based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table shows the presence or absence of consumption of the causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of the consumption of the causal value stock.

The "causal value stock" is given when the "causal value" becomes "100" or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes "100" or more, "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is selected as a lottery result. The lottery value specified according to the above is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, when giving an advantageous privilege to a player based on the value of the causal value stock, "no consumption" of the "causal value stock" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, the player is given an advantageous privilege without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

As a privilege given to the player based on the value of the causal value stock, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo-bonus to a higher pseudo-bonus. For example, when "BB" is determined as a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to "SBB". Further, when the transition to CZ1 is decided, the transition to CZ2 may be changed.

Benefits that are advantageous to the player are not given immediately when the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, but when specific conditions (determination of pseudo-bonus) are met, or at a specific time (determination of pseudo-bonus). It is preferable to give it when the pseudo bonus is drawn). In this case, after the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game until a specific condition is satisfied or a specific time is reached.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. 76. The operating condition table is referenced during each preparation. This operating condition table shows the type being prepared and the operating (end) condition set according to the type being prepared.

For example, if the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") is won during the preparation for SBB, the preparation for SBB ends and the SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is started. If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during BB preparation, the BB preparation is completed. BB in (bonus) is started.

If the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_R7_1") are won during RB preparation, the RB preparation is completed and the 1st bonus RB is started in. Also, during ART preparation, the winning numbers "18" to "24" (abbreviations "F_W7_KP_RT4", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R4_R2_1", "F_KP_R2_R4-1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1", "F_KP_R2_R4_1" The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

In the present embodiment, when the winning combination (winning number), which is the end condition under preparation, is won, the information (stop order navigation) for displaying the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (winning number) is notified. However, even if the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that is the end condition during preparation is not displayed as a stop, the preparation ends.

Therefore, when a stop operation that does not follow the stop order navigation is performed, the RT game state does not shift to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state, and the first ART (pseudo bonus) or the second ART is set as the sub game state. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (pseudo-bonus) and the second ART in the sub-game state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 game state or the RT4 game state.

<Structure of storage area provided in sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Although the description is omitted here (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering the effect content and the effect number and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. It has a storage area and the like.

The sub storage area is "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "RB2 flag" and "inter-flag flag". have.

The "CZ1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ1, and when it is in CZ1, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 flag". The "CZ2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of CZ2, and when it is in CZ2, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 flag".

The "SBB flag" is a flag indicating SBB in the first ART (pseudo-bonus), and when it is in SBB, "1" is stored in the "SBB flag". The "BB flag" is a flag indicating the inside of the BB in the first ART, and when the "BB flag" is in the BB, "1" is stored in the "BB flag". The "RB flag" is a flag indicating RB in the first ART, and when it is in RB, "1" is stored in the "RB flag".
That is, when the first ART is in progress, "1" is stored in any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag".

Further, the "ART flag" is a flag indicating that the second ART is in progress, and when the second ART is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART flag".

The "BR1 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR1, and when it is in BR1, "1" is stored in the "BR1 flag". Further, the "RB2 flag" is a flag indicating the inside of BR2, and when it is in BR2, "1" is stored in the "BR2 flag". As described above, during BR1 and BR2, 10 games are set as one set, and one set is repeated (looped) as long as "BR continuation" continues to win by continuous lottery.

Further, the "inter-flag flag" is a flag indicating the inter-flag interval, and when the inter-flag flag is inter-flag, "1" is stored in the "inter-flag flag".

Further, the sub storage area has an "additional addition A flag", an "additional addition B flag", an "additional addition C1 flag", an "additional addition C2 flag", and an "additional addition C3 flag".

The "additional addition A flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition A is in progress, and when the additional addition A is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition A flag". The "additional addition B flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition B is in progress, and when the additional addition B is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition B flag".

The "additional addition C1 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C1 is in progress, and when the additional addition C1 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C1 flag". The "additional addition C2 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C2 is in progress, and when the additional addition C2 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C2 flag". The "additional addition C3 flag" is a flag indicating that the additional addition C3 is in progress, and when the additional addition C3 is in progress, "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag". It should be noted that "1" is stored in the "additional addition C3 flag" from the time when the additional addition C3 is determined to the time when the additional addition C3 is started.

"CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag 2", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag", "Additional addition A flag", "Addition" The "additional B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag", and "additional addition C3 flag" actually start after the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is determined. "1" is stored until.

Further, the sub storage area has "CZ1 precursor flag", "CZ2 precursor flag", "BB precursor flag", "RB precursor flag", "ART precursor flag" and "BR precursor flag".

The "CZ1 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ1 precursor flag, and when the CZ1 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 precursor flag". The "CZ2 precursor flag" is a flag indicating the CZ2 precursor flag, and when the CZ2 precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 precursor flag".

The "BB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BB (SBB) precursor, and when the BB (SBB) precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BB precursor flag". The "RB precursor flag" is a flag indicating the RB precursor, and when the RB precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "RB precursor flag".

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether to use "SBB", "BB" or "RB". However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus is won, only whether or not to set it to "RB" is determined, and when it is decided not to set it to "RB", "RB" is set at the end of the precursor. You may draw a lottery as to whether it is "SB" or "BB".

The "ART precursor flag" is a flag indicating the ART (second ART) precursor, and when the ART precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART precursor flag". Further, the "BR precursor flag" is a flag indicating the BR precursor flag, and when the BR precursor flag is in progress, "1" is stored in the "BR precursor flag".

Further, the sub storage area has "SBB preparing flag", "BB preparing flag", "RB preparing flag", and "ART preparing flag".

The "SBB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the SBB is being prepared, and when the SBB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag". The "BB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the BB is being prepared, and when the BB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparing flag".

The "RB preparing flag" is a flag indicating that the RB is being prepared, and when the RB is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "RB preparing flag". The "ART preparing flag" is a flag indicating that ART is being prepared, and when ART is being prepared, "1" is stored in the "ART preparing flag".

In the present embodiment, "preparing" means a section in which it is conceptually determined to start a predetermined state, but the start condition cannot be satisfied and the start cannot be started. During preparation, it resembles Omen, but unlike Omen, it actively encourages people to meet the starting conditions.
For example, when the occurrence of ART is determined, it is necessary to make AT and RT co-occur in order to start ART. The AT can be started immediately by the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), while the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub-control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, in general, indirectly by performing "AT for satisfying the RT start condition by the main control circuit 91". It is urging the start of RT. That is, in general, the difference generated between the AT start timing by the sub control circuit 101 and the RT start timing by the main control circuit 91 is a section called preparation.

Then, if the determination of the ART end condition is started at the start of the AT, the AT period is included in the ART period, and in some cases, the ART period ends without the ART occurring. There is a risk. Such a game machine makes the player uncomfortable and makes design and development difficult because the period of ART assumed at the time of development (when the end condition is set) differs from the actual period of ART. It is also a factor.
Therefore, although the AT is performed until the RT (main control circuit 91 side) condition is satisfied, a section is provided so as not to be included in the ART period by not determining the ART end condition. And since this section is the section where ART is being prepared, it is said that this section is being prepared.

In addition, the sub storage area includes "CZ game number counter", "pseudo-bonus game number counter", "ART game number counter", "BR game number counter", "additional game number counter", and "additional game number counter". "have.

"1" is added to the "CZ game number counter" every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, and the value of the "CZ game number counter" is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. In the "pseudo-bonus game number counter", the number of games ("30" or "60" or "100") set according to the types of various pseudo-bonus is set before the pseudo-bonus is started. ..

Then, the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is deducted by "1" each time a game is played in the first ART (pseudo-bonus). When the "BB medium-high probability counter" described later has a value, the subtraction of the "pseudo-bonus game number counter" is stopped.

The "ART game number counter" is set to "50" before the second ART is started. Then, the "ART game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in the second ART. The "BR game number counter" is set to "10" before BR1 or BR2 is started. Then, the "BR game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

"2" is set in the "counter for the number of additional additional games" before the game related to the additional additional effect is started. Then, the "counter for the number of additional additional games" is subtracted by "1" each time a game related to the additional additional effect is performed.

The "additional game number counter" is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when the additional games are added. Therefore, each time the number of additional games is determined in the additional addition, the determined number of additional games is added to the "counter for the number of additional games".

In addition, the sub storage area is "CI (cut-in) number counter in CZ", "BB medium and high probability counter", "precursor game number counter", "preparing digestion G number counter", "internal point counter", " It has a "causal value counter" and a "causal value stock counter".

The "CI count counter in CZ" is set to "4" before CZ1 is started and "10" is set before CZ2 is started. Then, the "CI count counter in CZ" is subtracted by "1" each time the "navigation aiming at the black BAR" (cut-in effect) occurs.

When the number of additional Gs related to the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is determined by the lottery for adding the number of Gs in BB, the determined number of additional Gs is added to the "BB medium-high probability counter". When there is a value in the "BB medium-high probability counter", the first ART (pseudo-bonus) is in the high-probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that in the normal first ART.

In the "precursor game number counter", the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the "precursor game number counter" is subtracted by "1" each time a game is played in each precursor. "1" is added to the "preparing digestion G number counter" each time a game is played during each preparation, and the value of the "preparing digestion G number counter" is cleared when each preparation is completed.

In the "internal point counter", when the internal point is determined by the internal point lottery, the value of the determined internal point is added. When the "causal value" is determined based on the total of the internal points and the "provisional causal value", the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the "internal point counter".

In the "causal value counter", when the "causal value" is determined by the causal value lottery, the determined "causal value" is added. When the value of the "causal value counter" exceeds "100", "100" is subtracted from the value of the "causal value counter" and "1" is added to the "causal value stock counter".

Further, the sub storage area has a "BR continuation flag", a "BR one after another continuous storage area", and "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

The "BR continuation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, and when it is determined that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is started, it is set to the "BR continuation flag". "1" is stored.

The "BR continuous storage area one after another" is a storage area indicating whether or not BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, "1" is stored in the "BR one after another continuous storage area".

In the present embodiment, a special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from the BR continuous lottery. When the special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues until the set one after another. Further, when it is decided that BR1 or BR2 continues to the set one after another, a special effect for notifying whether or not the special BR is "continued" is performed.

“BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” are flags indicating whether or not the execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When the execution of BR1 is determined, "1" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32". When the execution of BR2 is determined, "2" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

In addition, the sub storage area has a "navigation return waiting state flag" and a "pseudo bonus penalty flag".

The “navigation return waiting state flag” is a flag that is set to be turned on when a so-called pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process (see FIG. 107) described later (S614 in FIG. 107). When the "navigation return wait state flag" is on, the ART game number counter is not subtracted in the ART in-process (see FIG. 105) described later. In addition, the "navigation return waiting state flag" indicates that in the game after the pullback is performed, the first stop operation (the first stop operation performed) is performed on a target other than the left reel 3L, or the first stop operation. When a predetermined winning number related to notification of the stop order is determined by the main CPU 93 during 2ART, it is set to off (S808 in the display command reception processing shown in FIG. 116, which will be described later). The predetermined winning numbers for which the stop order is notified during the second ART are, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers "12" and "25".

The "pseudo-bonus penalty flag" is a flag that is set to be on in the penalty determination process (see FIG. 117) described later when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo-bonus is won. Is. Further, the "pseudo-bonus penalty flag" is referred to in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) described later.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 99, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIG. 78.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area, which requires data to be erased for each game.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 46S and the start switch 64 is checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts an effect random value used for reel effect and lock control in the "continuous lock state", and stores the extracted effect random value in the effect random value storage area (non-existent) provided in the main RAM 95. Stored in (shown) (S5). In the present embodiment, as the effect random value, the effect random value 1, the effect random value 2, and the effect random value 3 are provided. These effect random values 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the internal winning combination and the like, and information on whether or not the occurrence of the game lock has been determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lock process at the start of the game (S10). In this process, the reel effect performed in the "continuous lock state" determined in the process of S8 and the reel effect and the lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of lock are mainly performed. The details of the lock process at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S11). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors is controlled by the interrupt process (see FIG. 99), which is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left reel 3L. , The rotation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and later in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). Further, in this process, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) are used. To match. Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S16). In this process, the hopper device 43 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the display combination, but the maximum number of medals to be paid out is three. The number of medals (upper limit of payout) is 14.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game, and checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic closing request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the re-game is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the medal selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 43.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state, the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "1", and in the other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state), the maximum value of the number of input sheets is set to "3". Set to.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S35 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the inserted number counter when the medals are inserted.

Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch is ON (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the medal selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 18. When this process is completed, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, the internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determining means).

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type of the internal lottery table and the number of lottery times based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The number of lottery indicates the number of times for each winning number specified by the internal lottery table to subtract the lottery value and determine whether or not a digit has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lottery value change process (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

In S45, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as a random value, and the winning number is added by 1.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

On the other hand, in S47, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the small win / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when the determination in S45 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current Acquire the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer according to the winning number (S49).

Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S55 described later.

On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the bonus internal winning combination determination table (when the determination is YES). (See FIG. 24), and the internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S54).

After the processing of S54 or when the determination in S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S55).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CB gaming state (S56). When the main CPU 93 determines in S56 that it is not in the CB gaming state (when the determination in S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78). ..

On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CB gaming state is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (when the determination in S56 is YES). S57). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) to determine whether or not the RT game state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any of bits 0 to 4 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). Then, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT game state flag is not on (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change process and performs the process by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80). ) Move to S43.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the RT game state flag is on (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the turned on RT game state. The lottery value of the winning numbers (“1” to “24”) related to the re-game of the internal lottery table for the general game state (see FIG. 19) is changed with reference to (S62). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state (S71). When the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is not in the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and shifts the process to S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78). ..

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that it is in the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and sets the effect random value to 1. Based on this, a game lock lottery is performed (S72).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock has been won in the game lock lottery of S72 (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has not been won (when the determination in S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process and performs the process in S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock has been won (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the game lock flag and the lock timer. As a result, the game lock is generated. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 29), and acquires the rotation cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 78. (S101).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30), and acquires various information corresponding to the reel stop number based on the acquired reel stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 93 has a pull-in priority table selection table number, a pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, and forward push corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number. The initial data for changing the time table and the table selection data for irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is "0" (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock timer value is not "0" (when the determination in S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the lock timer value becomes "0". stand by.

On the other hand, in S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is "0" (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock process at the start of the game and performs the process in the main flow (when the game starts. (See FIG. 78).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter as the number of searches in the main RAM 95 (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from, for example, a rotating reel, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small winning combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the symbol position data and sets "21" as the number of symbol checks (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code storage process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. The pull-in priority data is acquired by referring to the ranking table (see FIG. 37).

In addition, when the symbol of the combination (“C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D”, “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. 15) related to the combination (for example, “cherry”) for which the winning is confirmed in some reels is displayed, “ In the reel that becomes "ANY", the pull-in priority data of the combination is not acquired. In addition, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won internally will be determined on the reel for which the winning is confirmed, the attraction priority data is set to "stop prohibited (all bits 0)".

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other. Next, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the symbol check count (S129).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). When the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when the determination in S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

On the other hand, in S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S131).

When it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the attraction-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that the attraction priority table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process and stores the process in the attraction priority order. The process moves to S124 of the process (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table number is not set (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. Refer to the area (see FIG. 43) and set the corresponding pull-in priority table number (S142). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S124 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

In S142, first, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the attraction priority table selection table corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data, and acquires the attraction priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the symbol code storage process performed in S125 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In the present embodiment, as the effective line (winning determination line), one line (center line) is provided as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In this embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). When the main CPU 93 determines in S161 that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S161 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The ON edge / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S168 as the search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (when the determination in S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

On the other hand, in S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 78). (See), move to S15.

[Sliding piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “1000000” as line mask data in the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data. Select. Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00010000" as the line mask data in which "1" is set in the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects "00000010" in which "1" is set in bit 1 corresponding to the "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S182). When the main CPU 93 determines in S182 that it is not the first stop (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the second and third stop processes (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S182, when the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is performed (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the table selection data at the time of forward pressing is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the forward-pressed first stop stop table corresponding to the forward-pressed table selection data, and acquires the slip piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S191 described later.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S189). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the set irregular push stop table, and acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and shifts the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the second and third stop processes performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). When the main CPU 93 determines in S201 that it is not during the second stop operation (when the determination in S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that the second stop operation is in progress (when the determination in S201 is YES), the main CPU 93 pushes the stop buttons forward (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not it is (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is not forward (when the determination in S202 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S204 described later.

On the other hand, in S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push is forward (when the determination in S202 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line mask data change process (S204). The details of the line mask data change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number search process (S205). In this process, the number of slip pieces is determined based on the stop start position with reference to the stop tables (FIGS. 32, 34 and 35).

For example, when the line mask data is "00010000" corresponding to the "middle reel A line", the main CPU 93 refers to the column of the "middle reel A line" of the bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search for whether or not the corresponding data is "1" is sequentially performed. Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is "1" to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the slip piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processing, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change status is "1" or "2" (S211). When the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B-line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the processing of S204.

On the other hand, in S211 when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the column corresponding to the "middle reel line change bit" or "right reel line change bit" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when the determination in S213 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the line change bit check process. Is completed, and the process is transferred to S189 of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) or S204 in the flowcharts of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

On the other hand, in S213, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is "1", that is, the line change bit is ON (when the determination in S213 is YES), the main CPU 93 is B. Set the line status (S214). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and performs the processing in S189 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the processing of S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89) and S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). It should be noted that the C-line status is set when the forward push is performed in the control change process after the second stop (see FIG. 95), which will be described later.

In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button. Determine (S222).

In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the right stop button. Therefore, the process of S223 changes the line mask data from "00000010" to "10000000". As a result, the column of bits 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

On the other hand, in S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button in the forward push, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the process of S224 changes the line mask data from "00010000" to "01000000". As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

Further, in S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). .. When the main CPU 93 determines in S225 that the B line status is not set (when the determination in S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process and performs the process of determining the number of sliding pieces (FIG. FIG. Move to the process of S190 in (see 89) or S205 in the flowchart (see FIG. 90) of the second and third stop processes.

On the other hand, in S225, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is set (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to "B line data" in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referenced. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and performs the processing in S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) Move to the process of S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 89) of the slide piece number determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the game state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values in the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value in the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the slip piece number determination data (S233).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of slip pieces to the expected address at the start of stopping, and acquires the attraction priority data (S235).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S236, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips acquired in S234. The number of pieces is evacuated (S237).

Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S238).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of retracted sliding pieces (S240). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 89).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and performs the process in S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Move to.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). When the main CPU 93 determines in S252 that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the control process after the second stop will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

On the other hand, in S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not been after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S254). When the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process and shifts the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). ..

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that the forward push is performed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 33). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired scheduled stop position (S257).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the scheduled stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed does not match the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches is "0". (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not "0" (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is "0" (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 changes the table at the time of forward pressing. It is acquired as the third stop table number for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

Further, in S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated position to be changed matches the scheduled stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the second when the forward press is performed according to the value of the line change status. -Acquire the stop table number for the third stop and the C line check data (S262).

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers at the time of forward pressing (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after the second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 94) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the push is forward (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that the push is not forward (when the determination in S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop, and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 94). To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 93 is pushing forward (when the determination in S271 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (whether the change status is "3") or not. (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 94). Then, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop and controls change process (FIG. FIG. 94) also ends.

On the other hand, in S272, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on (when the determination in S272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S273, when the main CPU 93 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 is at the time of the stored forward pressing. "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for stopping, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing after the second stop, and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In this embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and checks the transition conditions of the RT gaming state that can be established in the RT gaming state of the migration source (current) (S281).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S284 described later.

On the other hand, in S282, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and shifts. Based on the conditions, the RT game state flag of the migration destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S283).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a display command transmission process (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is operating with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to.

On the other hand, in S321, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". Is determined (S322).

In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game state flag (MB game state flag) corresponding to the operating "MB". If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 13 during the MB game state.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets each value of the winning count counter and the playable count counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is subtracted by "1" when a small winning combination (a winning combination with a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the gameable count counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the playable number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is not "0" (when the determination in S327 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. , The process is transferred to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the winning count counter or the value of the playable count counter is "0" (when the determination in S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at the end of CB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the game state flag (CB game state flag) corresponding to "CB", clearing the values of the winning number counter and the game possible number counter is performed. After that, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is not operating (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "CB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that "CB" is not operating (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 processes during CB operation based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the bonus game is a prize (S334). In the present embodiment, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is the winning of the bonus game. In S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S338 described later.

On the other hand, in S334, when the main CPU 93 determines that the bonus game is a winning bonus (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating table (see FIG. 16). The corresponding bonus operation time processing is performed (S335). In the present embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16). Set the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value (“13”). Further, in this process, the CB operating process described in S333 is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

Further, when the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is not a prize (when the determination in S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the replay is a prize (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, an interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch on the stop switch board 65 are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a communication data transmission procedure (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). , Drive and control the corresponding stepping motor so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S345, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 23 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S347). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 141, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the reception of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives the command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command type is normal (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is one of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the processing of S502, if the received command type code is any one of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal. On the other hand, when the command type code is other than the plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is not a normal command type.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S503 that the command type is not normal (when the determination in S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

On the other hand, in S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is normal (when the determination in S503 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). .. The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 retrieves a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S515 described later.

On the other hand, in S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies the game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel whose rotation has stopped, a display combination, and a game state flag, which are specified by parameters, are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103. The reel.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the lamp data (S517). Then, the sub CPU 102 registers the accessory data (S518). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S518, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511 and repeats the processes after S511.

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S521), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the effect random value, determines the effect number by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and registers the effect number. Here, the effect number is data that specifies the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the effect data at the start according to the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that specifies animation data, sound data, lamp data, and accessory data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as displaying an image is executed. Then, after the processing of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S524).

In S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S524), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S525). In this process, when the additional addition B flag is on, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button (S526). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the display command is received (S527).

In S527, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display command is received (YES in S527), the sub CPU 102 performs the display command reception process (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub-game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub-game state based on the winning mode. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the display command will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S529). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S527, when it is determined that it is not the time when the display command is received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S530 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S531). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S530 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S532).

In S532, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start command has been received (when the determination in S532 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for starting the bonus (S533). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

On the other hand, in S532, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S532 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus end command is received (S534). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S534 that the bonus end command has been received (when the determination in S534 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for the bonus end (S535). After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

In S534, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S534 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the no-operation command is received (S536). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S536 that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S536 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

On the other hand, in S536, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S536), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S537). The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the processing of S537, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and shifts the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S522 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination process will be described. In the present embodiment, the start command reception processing described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 101.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is in progress (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), any one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus in-process (S542). The details of the pseudo-bonus processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not in progress (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (S543). .. During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the ART (S544). The details of the processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a normal processing (S545). The details of the normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

After the processing of S542 and S545, the sub CPU 102 performs the preparatory processing (S546). The details of this preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). The details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect lottery process (S548). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the processing of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing during pseudo bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the pseudo-bonus processing performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (S561). Examples of the pseudo-bonus preparation flag include an SBB preparation flag, a BB preparation flag, and an RB preparation flag. Therefore, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the SBB preparing flag, the BB preparing flag, and the RB preparing flag is on.

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag of the pseudo bonus is on (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparing flag is that the winning number "18" (abbreviated as "F_W7_KP_RT4") wins in the internal lottery process. In addition, the start conditions corresponding to the BB preparation flag and the RB preparation flag are the winning numbers "14" to "17" (abbreviations "F_R7_KP_RB_0", "F_R7_KP_RB_1", "F_RB_KP_R7_0", "F_RB_KP_7") in the internal lottery processing. It is to win.

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the start condition corresponding to each preparing flag (when the determination in S562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus start time processing (S563).

In the pseudo-bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparing flag corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus, and pseudo-values (“100” or “60” or “30”) corresponding to the started pseudo-bonus. Set to the game counter during the bonus. Further, the sub CPU 102 clears the preparing digestion G number counter. After the processing of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S562, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 does not satisfy the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag (when the determination in S562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag for the pseudo bonus is not on (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB flag is on (S564).

In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is ON (when the determination in S564 is YES), the sub CPU 102 increases the number of Gs in the BB based on the lottery table (see FIG. 54). An additional lottery process is performed (S565). In the BB medium G number addition lottery process, when the number of additional games is determined, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB medium / high probability counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART lottery process in BB based on the ART lottery table in BB, or a BR lottery process in BB based on a BR (battle rush) lottery table in BB (S566).

Specifically, it is a non-ART BB, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. If it is determined as a role, ART lottery processing during BB is performed. In addition, it is a BB during ART, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is determined as an internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. In that case, BR lottery processing is performed.

When the "ART win" is determined in the ART lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the "ART flag" (stores "1" in the "ART flag"). Further, when the "battle rush 1 win" is determined in the BR lottery process during BB, the sub CPU 102 stores "1" in the "BR stock storage area". Then, when the "battle rush 2 win" is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores "2" in the "BR stock storage area".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery result of S566 is the winning result (S567). That is, it is determined whether or not any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning is won (when the determination in S567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" (S568). The "reverse push" in the present embodiment means that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left".

The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) "7", "8", "10", and "11". In the present embodiment, when the winning numbers (small winning combination / replay data pointers) are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". On condition that, the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed.

When the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed, "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR"-" It is possible to stop and display the combination of the symbols of "white BAR". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is performed.

Perform the stop operation according to "Reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)", and the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed along the straight line. Then, the player can recognize that any one of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" has been decided. At this time, if it is a non-ART BB, the "ART win" is determined, and if it is an ART BB, the "battle rush 1 win" or the "battle rush 2 win" is determined.

Even if the data pointers (win numbers) for small roles and replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2" If none of the "wins" has been decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is not performed. That is, even if the combination of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" can be stopped and displayed, any of "ART win", "battle rush 1 win", and "battle rush 2 win" can be displayed. If is not decided, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)" is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as the internal winning combination, ART lottery processing in BB or BR lottery processing in BB is performed. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, even when an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery processing, the ART lottery processing in BB or the BR lottery processing in BB may be performed.

For example, if an internal winning combination other than the special internal winning combination is determined and one of "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning", and "Battle Rush 2 winning" is determined, then the special internal winning combination is determined. When the winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed. That is, after that, when a special internal winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined as the internal winning combination, "reverse push" is performed regardless of the result of the ART lottery process in BB or the BR lottery process in BB. Navi (navigation aiming at white BAR) ".

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S567 that it is not a winning prize (when the determination in S567 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a Gase reverse push lottery based on a Gase reverse push lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the reverse push lottery is performed. Then, when the "Gase reverse push winning" is decided, the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the white BAR)" is performed.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the ART lottery processing in BB and the BR lottery processing in BB are not performed. Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", none of "ART win", "Battle rush 1 win", and "Battle rush 2 win" is determined.

When the small winning combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", "C_HOM_B" to "C_HOM_J" and "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" are determined in duplicate as internal winning combinations ( (See FIGS. 25 and 26). Then, when the small combination / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is changed to "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" on condition that the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left". The combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed.

Therefore, when the small role / replay data pointers are "6" and "9", the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at white BAR)". Even so, the combination of the "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" symbols is not stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that none of the "ART win", the "battle rush 1 win", and the "battle rush 2 win" has been determined.

When "C_HOM_B", "C_HOM_E" to "C_HOM_G" are determined as internal winning combinations, if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing, "white BAR"-"white BAR" until the second stop. The combination of the symbols of "white BAR" is a stop mode (so-called "tempai") in which the stop can be displayed along a straight line. Then, at the third stop, the combination of the symbols "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" is not stopped and displayed.

After the processing of S568 and S569, or when the determination of S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RB flag is ON (S570).

In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is ON (when the determination in S570 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery processing in the RB based on the ART lottery table in the RB (not shown). Alternatively, the RB medium BR lottery process is performed based on the RB medium BR lottery table (not shown) (S571).

Specifically, when it is a non-ART RB and the small role / replay data pointer (winning number) is "7", "8", "10", "11", the number of ART sets in the RB is set. Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, if the RB is in ART and the data pointers (winning numbers) for small wins / replays are "7", "8", "10", and "11", the BR lottery process in RB is performed.

After the processing of S571 or when the determination in S571 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB medium-high probability counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB medium-high probability counter by "1" (S573). ..

On the other hand, in S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB medium-high probability counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter (1). S574).

After the processing of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the pseudo-bonus game number counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo-bonus processing and receives a start command for the processing. Move to S546 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the game number counter during the pseudo bonus is not 1 or more (when the determination in S575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo bonus end processing (S576).

In the pseudo-bonus end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo-bonus that has ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start processing. When the type of the completed pseudo-bonus is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs the ART start processing. Further, when "1" or "2" is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR start processing.
After the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the pseudo-bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, the ART processing performed in S544 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the start command reception processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is either the BR flag 1 or the BR flag 2.

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53). Bonus lottery processing is performed (S582).

When the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus distribution lottery process based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (pseudo-bonus). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ") Is turned on.

After the process of S582, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional lottery process based on the additional lottery table (not shown) (S583). When the number of additional games is determined by this additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. The BR lottery process may be performed separately from the additional lottery process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "preparing flag (ART preparing flag)" is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on (S584). In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on (when the determination in S584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART processing. The process is transferred to S546 of the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 103).

In S584, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparing flag is not on and the navigation return waiting state flag is not on (when the determination in S584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the ART game number counter. "1" is subtracted (S585).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART pullback process (S586). The details of the ART pullback process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After the processing of S586, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a value of 1 or more for the number of additional games. Whether or not it is determined (S587).

In S587, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the additional game number counter by "1". (S588). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (S589).

In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is ON (when the determination in S589 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds the additional additional A. The G number lottery process is performed (S590). In the additional additional A additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional A additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined additional game number to the ART game number counter. .. After the processing of S590, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" and the additional additional A flag is not on (when the determination in S589 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional additional games. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is "0" (S591).

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the additional additional C flag ("additional additional C1 flag", " It is determined whether or not the "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") is on (S592).

In S592, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition C flag is ON (when the determination in S592 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S593). That is, the additional C additional G number lottery process of S593 is performed on the start lever 16 before the additional C additional G number lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is completed. Will be executed if

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional additional C additional G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is "continuation" (S594). If "1" or more is determined as the number of additional games by the additional C additional G number lottery process of S593, it becomes "continue", and "0" is determined as the additional game number by the additional additional C additional G number lottery process. If so, it will be "no continuation".

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is "continue" (when the determination in S594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S593, and the number of additional games is set as the number of additional games by the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing of S593. The processing of S593 and S594 is repeated until "0" is determined. Even if the number of times the additional C additional G number lottery process is performed reaches the specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), "no continuation" is determined and the additional C additional G number lottery process is completed. Good. Further, when the number of times the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing is performed reaches the specified number of times, even if the lottery result is "continuation", the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no continuation. The additional addition C addition G number lottery process may be completed.

In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not "continue" (when the determination in S594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S595). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 causes the corresponding additional addition flags (“additional addition A flag”, “additional addition B flag”, “additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3”. Flag ") is turned off. Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

After the processing of S595 or when the determination in S592 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S596). The details of the BR continuous processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S587, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S600).

In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition and promotion lottery processing (S601).

In the additional addition and promotion lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the additional addition and promotion lottery table (see FIG. 60), and the additional addition flag corresponding to the determined addition content (“additional addition A flag”, Turn on the "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag").

In addition, only one of the additional additional flags is turned on. Moreover, even if the additional addition may shift to the upper rank, it does not shift to the lower rank. For example, if the additional content determined this time is higher than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined last time is turned off, and the additional addition flag corresponding to the additional content determined this time is turned on. .. On the other hand, if the additional content determined this time is lower than the additional content determined last time, the additional addition flag corresponding to the previously determined additional content is kept on.

In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation rewriting lottery process (S602).

In the BR continuation rewriting lottery process, the sub CPU 102 draws whether or not to rewrite the BR "discontinuity" to "continuation" based on the BR continuation rewriting lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to rewrite the "discontinuation" of the BR to the "continuation", the BR continuation processing is performed (see FIG. 108).

After the processing of S601 and S602, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BR game number counter by "1" (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR game number counter is "1" or more (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (process at the time of receiving the start command). Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S605).

In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when the determination in S605 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR end processing (S606). At the end of BR processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag (“BR1 flag 1” or “BR2 flag”). Further, when the turned-off flag is the "BR2 flag", or when the number of BR continuations is a predetermined number (for example, "20 or more"), the sub CPU 102 uses the "SBB flag" and the "SBB preparing flag". And "BR1 flag" are turned on. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is "1" or more (when the determination in S605 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process when the BR continues (S607). In the BR continuous addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the BR continuous additional lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of additional games to the value of the ART game number counter. In the additional lottery process for continuing BR of the present embodiment, "0" is not determined as the number of additional games, but a specified number (for example, "10") or more is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional addition flag is on (S608). In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is ON (when the determination in S608 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "2" to the value of the additional addition game number counter (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is not ON (when the determination in S608 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S610). After the processing of S610, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during ART, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the ART pullback process performed in S586 in the flowchart of the process during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. The ART pullback process is a process of performing so-called pullback, in which "50" is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability while the sub-game state is the second ART.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (S611).

In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process and processes during ART (FIG. 105 and FIG. 106) also end.

In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART pullback lottery process (S612). In the ART pullback lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process using random numbers on the program, and when the lottery result is a win, "50" is set again in the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 subtracts a predetermined lottery value from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment), and when the result of the subtraction becomes negative, Judged as winning. The value of the predetermined lottery value can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, it is set to, for example, "3000" so that the probability of pullback is 1% or less.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is "0" (S613). If no pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process of S612, the value of the ART game number counter remains "0", so that the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is "0". Judgment (S613YES determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process and also ends the ART in-process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

When a pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process of S612, "50" is set again in the ART game number counter, so that the sub CPU 613 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0". (S613NO determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) (S614), ends the ART pullback process, and also ends the ART in-process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuous processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuous processing performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds "10" to the value of the BR game number counter (S622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR successive continuation flag is "1" (S623).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is "1" (when the determination in S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and sets the BR continuation continuation storage area to "1". 2 ”is set (stored) (S624).

In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR continuation continuation flag is not "1" (when the determination in S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation lottery process (S625). In the BR continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is decided to continue BR in S625 (S626). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S626 that it has not been determined to continue BR (when the determination in S626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing and is processing during ART (FIGS. 105 and FIG. 106) also ends.

After the processing of S624, or when the determination of YES in S626, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation determination processing (S627). The details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation processing, and also ends the ART processing (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[Processing when BR continuation is decided]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BR continuation determination processing performed in S627 in the flowchart of the BR continuation processing flowchart (see FIG. 108) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional lottery process during BR (S641). In the additional addition lottery process during BR, the sub CPU 102 determines the additional addition content based on the additional addition lottery table during BR. Then, the additional addition flag ("additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3 flag") corresponding to the determined additional addition content is set. Turn on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a continuous lottery process one after another in BR (S643). In the BB one after another continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to "continue" the BR one after another based on the BR one after another continuous lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is decided to "continue" the BR one after another, "1" is stored in the BR one after another continuation storage area. If the value of the BR successive continuous storage area is "2", the BR continuous continuous lottery process is not performed. After the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the BR continuation determination processing, and also ends the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 108).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal processing performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in CZ (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on and the CZ precursor flag is off. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that it is not in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a mode lottery process (S662).

In the present embodiment, in a general state, a plurality of modes in which the winning rate of CZ and the winning rate of a bonus (pseudo-bonus) are different are provided. In the mode lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the mode based on the mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ rush lottery process (S663). In the CZ rush lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ is won based on the CZ rush lottery table (not shown). Then, when the winning of the CZ is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus lottery process based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). When the winning of the bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus ("SBB", "BB" or "RB") is determined based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined precursor games are stored in the precursor game counter. After the processing of S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S661 that the sub CPU 102 is in the CZ (when the determination in S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in additional lottery process in the CZ (S665). In the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to add "1" to the specified number of times based on the CZ medium cut-in additional lottery table (see FIG. 51). Then, when it is decided to add "1" to the specified number of times, "1" is added to the CI number counter in CZ.
As the cut-in additional lottery process in CZ according to the game machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not to add "2" or more to the specified number of times.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has been won (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)". Is set (S667).

When the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). Is a condition, the combination of symbols related to "C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E" is stopped and displayed. As a result, when the winning number "4" is won and the stop order is "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left", depending on the timing of the stop operation, "black BAR"-"black BAR" corresponding to "C_BAR_A" "-The combination of" black BAR "symbols may be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won, "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed according to the "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" and the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed, the player , You can recognize that you have won the bonus (pseudo bonus).

After the processing of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus winning processing (S668). In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag corresponding to the determined bonus (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the preparing flag (“SBB preparing flag”, “BB preparing flag” or “RB preparing flag”) ) Is turned on.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S669). In the CZ end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CI number counter during CZ. After the processing of S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated as "F_C_BAR1") has not been won (when the determination in S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a cut-in generation lottery process during CZ (S671). The CZ medium cut-in generation lottery process determines whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)”) based on the CZ medium cut-in generation lottery table (see FIG. 52). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a win to generate a cut-in (S672). In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and performs the processing at the time of receiving the start command (when the process is received (S672). Move to S546 (see FIG. 103).

In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is a win to generate a cut-in (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at the black BAR)" (S673). ).

In the present embodiment, when "loss" is determined by the internal lottery process, a lottery is performed in S671 to determine whether or not to generate a cut-in ("reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)"). Therefore, in S671, even if it is decided to generate a cut-in and the stop operation is performed according to "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)", "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" The combination of symbols of "" is not stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the stop table selected at the time of "loss" of the present embodiment displays the right when the stop order is "right, left, middle" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aiming at the black BAR). The number of sliding pieces at which the "black BAR" can be stopped is set in the window 4R and the middle display window 4C. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of the "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" symbols will be stopped and displayed until the second stop.

After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the CI count counter in CZ by "1" (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (S675). In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter during CZ is not "0" (when the determination in S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and starts the processing when the start command is received. The process moves to S546 of the process (see FIG. 103).

In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter in CZ is "0" (when the determination in S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S676). The details of the causal value-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S677). After the processing of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the causal value-related processing performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal processing (see FIG. 110) and S723 in the flowchart of the processing in preparation (see FIG. 112) will be described.
The causal value-related processing of the present embodiment is executed at various timings based on the conditions according to the various causal value lottery tables.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to the causal value counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S702 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing and performs the processing during normal processing (normal processing). It is transferred to S677 of (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparatory process (see FIG. 112).

In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the causal value stock counter (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S704). After the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value-related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 of the normal intermediate processing (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the preparing processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the preparatory process to be performed in S546 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is being prepared (S721). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S721 that the preparation is not in progress (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process and shifts the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is in progress (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the preparation digestion G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S723).

After the processing of S723, the sub CPU 102 refers to the operating condition table (see FIG. 76) and determines whether or not the operating conditions are satisfied (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S724 that the operating conditions are not satisfied (NO in S724), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding preparing flag and clears the value of the preparing digestion G number counter. (S725). After the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the preparatory processing, and shifts the processing to S547 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Omen check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the precursor check process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is in the precursor (S741). During the omen, the value of the omen game counter is "1" or more. In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor is not in progress (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the omen is in progress (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the omen game number counter by "1" (S742). However, if the preparing flag is on, the value of the precursor game counter is not subtracted by "1".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (S473). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives a start command. Move to S548 of time processing (see FIG. 103).

In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter has become "0" (when the determination in S743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of CZ (S744). .. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of CZ by the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that it is at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the CZ start process (S745).

In the CZ start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag and sets the initial value according to the type of the CZ flag in the CI count counter during CZ. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is "4", and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is "10". After the process of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of CZ (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of the bonus (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of the bonus by the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) related to the pseudo bonus.

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the bonus (S747). In the bonus start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and performs the bonus start processing according to the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) related to the pseudo bonus that is turned on. Do.

When the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparing flag, and when the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparing flag. When the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB preparing flag. After the process of S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process, and shifts the process to S548 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103).

In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of the bonus (when the determination in S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of ART (second ART) (S748). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of ART (second ART) by the ART precursor flag.

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the ART start time processing (S749). In the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparing flag. However, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART preparing flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 sets "50" in the ART game number counter. After the processing of S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the start of ART (second ART) (when the determination in S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the start of BR (S750). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the start of BR by the BR precursor flag.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is not at the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and performs the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) S548. Move to.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that it is the start of BR (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S752). After the processing of S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Direction lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines the effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined effect number is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a provisional causal value lottery process (S763). .. In the provisional causal value lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the provisional causal value lottery table and determines the provisional causal value based on the type of development effect. Then, the determined provisional causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of the internal points, and determines the causal value as the causal value. Then, the determined causal value is added to the value of the causal value counter. Further, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the causal value stock (S766). ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the causal value counter by "100" (S767). After the processing of S767, when the determination in S762 or S765 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock effect has occurred (S768). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a lock effect is generated based on the parameters of the start command.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S768 that the lock effect has not occurred (when the determination in S768 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 103). To do. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect has occurred (when the determination in S768 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the effect number determined in S761 in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a fake effect parameter lottery process (S770). The fake effect parameter is a parameter for determining the effect number of the fake effect by the same process as the normal effect number lottery process (performed in S761), and is a parameter that substitutes for the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (S771). The confirmation screen means that the liquid crystal display device 11 is displaying a screen for notifying that the bonus has been determined.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S771 that the development effect is not in progress or the confirmation screen is not in progress (when the determination in S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the effect number lottery process using the fake effect parameter determined in S770. S772). After the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is in progress or the confirmation screen is in progress (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the fake push order navigation effect lottery process (S773). After the processing of S773, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 103).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S525 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and directs the processing. The process moves to S526 of the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional B flag is on. (S782). In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is not on (when the determination in S782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and performs the processing to determine the effect content (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 102), move to S526.

In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is ON (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B addition G number lottery process (S783). In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional B additional G number lottery table, and adds the determined additional game number to the additional game number counter.

In the additional B additional G number lottery process, the number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of additional games determined in the previous stop operation is acquired by referring to the number of additional games counter.

After the process of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the third stop operation (S784). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S784 that the operation is not the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing and performs the processing to determine the effect content (see FIG. 102). ) S526.

In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when the determination in S784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the additional addition B end time processing (S785). In the processing at the end of the additional addition B, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Further, the value of the additional game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the additional game number counter is cleared. After the processing of S785, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Processing when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the display command reception processing performed in S528 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described. In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub-game state transition process and a penalty determination process for shifting the sub-game state based on the winning mode.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to various flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and determines whether or not the sub game state is in the normal state (S801). The sub CPU 102 has the "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag" and "ART flag" of the sub storage area. Refer to "Preparing flags", and if these flags are off, it is determined that the sub-game state is normal.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in the normal state (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process in the normal state (S802). Specifically, when the CZ precursor flag (“CZ1 precursor flag” or “CZ2 precursor flag”) of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) is on and the number of CZ precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 sets the sub game state. Transfer to CZ. Further, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the ART precursor flag is off, and the number of ART precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state during the preparation for ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub-game state transition process (S802) during normal operation.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not normal (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and the sub game state is changed. It is determined whether or not it is in CZ (S803). When the CZ flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in CZ.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in the CZ (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process in the CZ (S804). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the CI number counter in CZ is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the normal state. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S804) in the CZ.

In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in the CZ (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART preparation flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and the sub game The state determines whether or not ART is being prepared (S805). When the ART preparation flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is ART preparation.

In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is preparing for ART (when the determination in S805 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during ART preparation (S806). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART rush replay, that is, any one of "C_Small V_REP_A" to "C_Small V_REP_C" wins a prize, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S806) during ART preparation.

In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not preparing for ART (when the determination in S805 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area and is in the sub game state. Determines whether or not it is in ART (S807). When the ART flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in ART.

In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in ART (when the determination in S807 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area. Whether or not the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L, or whether the navigation return waiting state flag is on and the navigation return waiting state flag is on and , It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order, that is, whether or not the predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order is determined by the main control circuit 91. Based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number is a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order. The predetermined winning numbers related to the notification of the stop order in the ART (second ART) are, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers "12" and "25".

In S808, when it is determined that the navigation return waiting state flag is on and the first stop operation is performed on a target other than the left reel 3L, or the navigation return waiting state flag is on and a predetermined stop order is notified. When it is the winning number (when the determination in S808 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the navigation return waiting state flag (S809). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.
In the present embodiment, when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, the sub-game state is the "second ART", but the liquid crystal display device 11 is in the normal state (for example, the sub-game state is the "general state"). A screen similar to the one displayed at) is displayed. In this case, the stop operation by pressing forward is recommended. Therefore, if the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in a stop order other than the forward push when the navigation return wait state flag is on, the main CPU 93 determines a predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stop order as a penalty. Even if it is not, set the navigation return wait status flag to off. Therefore, the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game (see S584 and S585 in FIG. 105).

In S808, when the navigation return waiting state flag is off, it is not determined that the first stop operation (the first stop operation is performed) is performed on a reel other than the left reel 3L, or the stop order is notified. If it is not the predetermined winning number (when the determination in S809 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.

In S810, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during ART. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and when the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub game state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the normal state. Further, when the BR game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to BR. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S810) during ART.

In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in ART (when the determination in S807 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BR1 flag and the BR2 flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area and subs. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is in BR (S811). When the BR1 flag or the BR2 flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in BR.

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is in BR (when the determination in S811 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during BR (S812). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32" (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and "1" and "2" are stored in each of them. If not, that is, without BR stock, the BR game number counter is 0, and if the SBB is won, that is, if there is SBB stock, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state between the flags. Further, when the sub CPU 102 has no BR stock and the BR game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S812) during BR.

In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not in BR (when the determination in S811 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the flag between flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and is in the sub game state. Determines whether or not it is between flags (S813). When the inter-flag flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is between the flags.

In S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is between the flags (when the determination in S813 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process between the flags (S814). Specifically, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state during the first ART, that is, during the pseudo bonus. Further, when the stop operation is performed by the player in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to the pseudo bonus. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub-game state transition process (S814) between the flags.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the sub game state transition process during the pseudo bonus (S815). Specifically, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is not won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to normal. Further, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is won during the pseudo bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state between the flags. Further, when the bonus winning game number counter is 0 and the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to ART preparation. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub game state transition process (S815) during the pseudo bonus.

The sub CPU 102 performs the penalty determination process in S816. In the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established. Details of the penalty determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117. After the penalty determination process (S816), the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the display command is received.

[Penalty judgment processing]
Next, the penalty determination process performed in S816 in the flowchart of the display command reception process (see FIG. 116) will be described with reference to FIG. 117. The penalty determination process is a process of turning on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established.

For example, when the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers (see FIG. 48) are "14" to "17", the sub CPU 102 is a combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2". (A combination of symbols in which the first ART in which the type of the pseudo bonus is RB is started when the stop is displayed) is notified of the stop order for displaying the stop. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, when the rotation stop numbers are "14" and "15", "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" is notified as the stop order. When the rotation stop numbers are "16" and "17", "left middle right" or "left and right middle" is notified as the stop order. Then, when the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order and the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the first ART in which the pseudo-bonus type is RB is started.

However, even if the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are "14" and "15", and the sub CPU 102 notifies "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" as the stop order, the game The person may perform the stop operation in the stop order of "left middle right" or "left and right middle" without following the stop order. Further, even if the determined pseudo-bonus type is RB and the rotation stop numbers are "16" and "17", and the sub CPU 102 notifies "left middle right" or "left and right middle" as the stop order, the game is played. A person may perform a stop operation in the stop order of "right, left, middle" or "right, middle, left" without following the stop order. In these cases, when the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 1" is stopped and displayed, the first ART in which the type of pseudo-bonus is BB is started. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the RB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the BB flag. In addition, when the determined pseudo-bonus type is BB, and the stop operation is performed without following the stop order notified by the player, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed. However, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the RB flag. The sub CPU 102 turns off the pseudo-bonus penalty flag when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo-bonus started when the pseudo-bonus is established is completed.

As shown in FIG. 117, first, in the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress (S817). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and if any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag" is on, it is determined that a pseudo bonus is in progress, and any of them. If the flag of is not turned on, it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not in progress.

If it is determined in S817 that the pseudo-bonus is not in progress (NO in S817), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

In S817, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is in progress (YES in S817), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus is established by ignoring the navigation, that is, the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus has been won (S818). When the stop operation is performed in the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is won, the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo bonus is not established by ignoring the navigation.

In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not established by ignoring the navigation (when the determination in S818 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is established by ignoring the navigation (when the determination in S818 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area (S819). After S819, the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S537 in the flowchart (see FIG. 102) of the effect content determination processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (S820). In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is not "1" (when the determination in S820 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional game number counter is "1" (when the determination in S820 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional additional C flag is on. (S821). In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional C flag is not on (when the determination in S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional additional C flag is ON (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the input number is the number that can start the game (S822). The fact that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game means that the start operation can be accepted.

In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S822 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S822 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BET switch 62 is on (S823). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is pressed.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the BET switch 62 is not on (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827. On the other hand, in S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BET switch 62 is ON (when the determination in S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S824).

In the additional C additional G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games based on the additional C additional G number lottery table. Then, the determined number of additional games is added to the value of the number of additional games counter. When the number of additional games of "1" or more is determined in the lottery process for the number of additional G added C, the "continuation" of the additional additional C is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not "continuation" is determined in the additional addition C addition G number lottery process (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has been determined (when the determination in S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S827.

In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continuation" has not been determined (when the determination in S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C end time processing (S826). In the processing at the end of the additional addition C, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag”, or “additional addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the additional game number counter is cleared.

After the processing of S826, if S820, S821, S822 or S823 is determined to be 23NO, or if S825 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 102 performs the lock effect control process (S827). The details of the lock effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. After the processing of S827, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Lock effect control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the lock effect control process performed in S827 in the flowchart of the non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the RT4 gaming state (S828). The RT game state information controlled by the main CPU 93 is sent from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as a parameter such as a start command. In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S828 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S828 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is preparing for ART or during the first ART (pseudo bonus). It is determined whether or not it is other than (S829). In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S829 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is other than during ART preparation or the first ART (pseudo bonus) (when the determination in S829 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is locked under the control of the main CPU 93. It is determined whether or not the production brake has been started (S830).

When the lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "main lock effect") controlled by the main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment is started, first, the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated forward. Next, a brake is generated on the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop the forward rotation. Then, after rotating the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reverse direction, the main lock effect is finished. Information indicating that the forward rotation, braking, stopping, and reverse rotation of these three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been started is included in, for example, a no-operation command.

In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has not been started (when the determination in S830 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S832.

In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake for the main lock effect has been started (when the determination in S830 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts the delay count (S831). In this process, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is set in the delay counter. After the processing of S831, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 118).

When the determination in S828, S829 or S830 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the delay is being counted (S832). In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is not in progress (when the determination in S832 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S837.

In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is in progress (when the determination in S832 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is in progress (S833). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S833 that the main lock effect is not in progress (when the determination in S833 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S837.

In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is in progress (when the determination in S833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000. (S834).

In the present embodiment, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is acquired in S831 and set in the delay counter. That is, with the number of clocks of the sub CPU acquired in S831 as the counting starting point, it is determined whether or not the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks is acquired from the sub CPU 102.

In the present embodiment, when the number of clocks obtained by adding 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks set in the delay counter is acquired from the sub CPU 102, one second has elapsed from the time when the number of clocks of the sub CPU is set in the delay counter. To do. Therefore, in S831, it is determined whether or not one second has elapsed since the brake for the main lock effect was generated.

In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 does not exceed 1000000 (when the determination in S834 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S837.

In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1,000,000 (when the determination in S834 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the subblock effect determination process (when the determination is YES). S835). In the sub-game effect determination process, a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "sub-game effect") controlled by the sub CPU 102 is determined according to the internal winning combination, the sub-game state, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 ends the delay count (S836). In this process, the value of the delay counter is cleared.

After the processing of S836, when the determination in S832, S833 or S834 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the main lock effect is completed (S837). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is completed. In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has not been completed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process and processes when a non-operation command is received (FIG. 118). See) also ends.

In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has ended (when the determination in S837 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect ends (S838). As a result, the effect determined before the game lock occurs (the effect determined before the fake effect and the sublock effect) is executed after the game lock ends.

After the processing of S838, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing, and also ends the non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 118).

[Direction related to game lock]
Next, the effect to be executed when the game lock occurs will be described.

In the present embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game lock during the RT4 game state (see FIGS. 39 and 82). When the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is started, and even if the throwing operation or the stopping operation is performed until a predetermined period elapses, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

During the period in which the game lock is generated, the main CPU 93 (main control circuit 91) executes the main lock effect. This main lock effect is a reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are operated in the order of forward rotation, brake, stop, and reverse rotation.

On the other hand, when the game lock occurs, the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined by the effect number lottery process in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769 in FIG. 114). Then, the fake effect is determined and executed (see S770 and S772 in FIG. 114). This fake effect can be determined by the effect number lottery process that is normally performed by using the fake effect parameter. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program design and debugging related to the lottery of fake production.

The fake effect is the same as the effect performed in a normal game (a game in which the game lock does not occur), and is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the like. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the effect is a fake effect during the game lock or an effect performed in a normal game. As a result, during the forward rotation of the main lock effect and during the execution of the fake effect, the player can be made to think that the normal game has started.

When the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) uses the number of clocks of the CPU to count from the occurrence of the brake to the elapse of 1 second (see S830, S831, and S834 in FIG. 119). ). Then, one second after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sublock effect is determined and executed (see S835 in FIG. 119). That is, when one second elapses after the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the effect performed by using the display device is changed from the fake effect to the sublock effect.

In the sublock effect, the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, etc. are used to shift to a pseudo bonus (first ART) or ART (second ART) (shift to a gaming state advantageous for the player). Notifies that has been determined. That is, in the subblock effect, an image different from the image displayed in the effect executed in the normal game is displayed.
When the game lock and the main lock effect are completed, the effect corresponding to the effect number stored in the storage area after the lock effect is completed is controlled by the sub CPU 102.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate forward in the same manner as in the case where the normal game is performed, and then the brake is generated. However, the fake effect controlled by the sub CPU 102 (same as the effect performed in a normal game) is sustained for 1 second after the brake is generated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the notification of information by the effect related to the game lock.

Next, the accessory control task, the lamp control task, the sound control task, and the animation control task executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. These tasks (processes) are executed in parallel by the sub CPU 102. Further, these tasks are repeatedly executed by the sub CPU 102 in a cycle of 33 msec.

[Character control task]
First, the accessory control task will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The accessory control task is a task for managing and controlling the rotating accessory 123.

In S901 of the accessory control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the accessory data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the process to S902 (S901). If there is no registered accessory data (including the case where it has already been taken out), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S902.

In S902, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is the registered accessory data (S902). When it is determined that there is no accessory data registered in S902 (when the determination in S902 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S905.

When it is determined that there is the accessory data registered in S902 (when the determination in S902 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the accessory effect sequence from the accessory sequence table based on the extracted accessory data (S903). .. The accessory effect sequence is composed of data indicating an effect pattern relating to the rotating accessory 123 (data indicating a rotation direction, rotation speed, rotation time, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as accessory pattern data). The character effect sequence may be composed of a single character effect pattern data, or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of character effect pattern data. Some of the accessory pattern data constituting the accessory effect sequence has a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the accessory pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the character effect sequence, with respect to each character pattern data constituting the character effect sequence, the character pattern data is the character pattern data related to the character interlocking effect described later (hereinafter referred to as interlocking character pattern data). It is configured to include data indicating whether or not it is (may be referred to as). The character effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of character effect sequences, and associates the character data with the character effect sequence.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired bonus effect sequence as the bonus effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S904).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory effect sequence data update process (S905). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of each accessory pattern data constituting the set accessory effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the rotating accessory 123 is determined by the pattern of the accessory pattern data. Instructs the accessory control board 78 to operate. For example, the character data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) is the character data A, and the start of the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A associated with the character data A. When the condition is the first stop operation, when the sub control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the first stop operation, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data A is satisfied, and the accessory pattern data. The accessory control board 78 is instructed to operate the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern A.

When the character pattern data following the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A is the character pattern data B and the start condition of the character pattern data B is the second stop operation, the character pattern data When the sub-control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the second stop operation while the rotating accessory 123 is operating in the pattern A, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the accessory pattern data B is satisfied. Then, the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to stop the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the accessory pattern data A and operate in the pattern of the accessory pattern data B. Further, in the same case, when the rotating accessory 123 finishes the operation in the pattern of the accessory pattern data A before the sub-control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command related to the second stop operation, the rotating accessory 123 Regarding whether the sub CPU 102 instructs the accessory control board 78 to operate (loops) again with the pattern of the accessory pattern data A, or keeps the non-operating state. It can be arbitrarily set on the character effect sequence or on the character pattern data.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory operating state information update process (S906). In this process, the sub CPU 102 has information indicating the operating state of the rotating accessory unit 122 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (accessory pattern data related to the instruction to the accessory control board 78, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.). The accessory operating state information is stored or overwritten.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory effect interlocking request processing (S907). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the accessory pattern data for which the operation is instructed to the accessory control board 78 in S905 is the interlocking accessory pattern data, and if it is the interlocking accessory pattern data, it will be described later. Add (entry) an operation start request to the lamp status information, sound playback status information, and animation playback status information. Further, when the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the interlocking pattern data is completed, the sub CPU 102 adds (entries) the interlocking end request to the lamp state information, the sound reproduction state information, and the animation reproduction state information. The sub CPU 102 determines the end timing of the operation of the rotating accessory 123 in the pattern of the interlocking accessory pattern data based on the count of the number of rotations, the elapsed time from the operation instruction, and the like.
Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S901 after S907.

[Ramp control task]
Next, the lamp control task will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The lamp control task is a task of controlling the output of light from a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22.

In S911 of the lamp control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the lamp data registered in S517 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the process to S912 (S911). If there is no registered lamp data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S912.

In S912, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is the registered lamp data (S912). When it is determined that there is no lamp data registered in S912 (when the determination in S912 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S915.

When it is determined that there is the lamp data registered in S912 (when the determination in S912 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the lamp effect sequence from the lamp sequence table based on the extracted lamp data (S913). The lamp effect sequence may be referred to as data indicating an effect pattern related to a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (data indicating a lighting pattern, the number of times of lighting, lighting time, brightness, color tone, etc., hereinafter referred to as lamp pattern data. ). The lamp effect sequence may be composed of a single lamp pattern data or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of lamp pattern data. Some of the lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the lamp effect sequence, for each lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence, is the pattern data the pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocking lamp pattern data) related to the lamp accessory interlocking effect (see S919) described later? It is composed of data indicating whether or not it is present. The lamp effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of lamp effect sequences, and associates the lamp data with the lamp effect sequence. In the present embodiment, among the lamp pattern data in which the reception of the display command constituting the lamp effect sequence in the pseudo-bonus is set as the start condition, the data related to the reel lamp 22 shows a pattern of blinking at predetermined intervals.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired lamp effect sequence as the lamp effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S914).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the display command is received (S915). When it is determined in S915 that the display command is not received (NO in S915), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

In S915, when it is determined that the display command is received (YES in S915), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is in the pseudo-bonus and the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is on (S916). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and any one of the "SBB flag", "BB flag", and "RB flag" is on, and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is on. It is determined whether or not it is. In S916, when it is determined that the sub-game state is not in the pseudo-bonus or the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is not on (when the determination in S916 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S918.

In S916, when it is determined that the sub-game state is in the pseudo-bonus and the pseudo-bonus penalty flag is ON (when the determination in S916 is YES), the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data set in S914. Is changed to all lighting patterns (S917). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 blinks the data related to the reel lamp 22 among the lamp pattern data whose start condition is the reception of a display command (third stop operation off) in the lamp effect sequence data at predetermined intervals. Rewrite from to all lighting patterns, that is, patterns that light without blinking.

In S918, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (S918). The lamp status information is information indicating the status of the headlamp 21, the reel lamp 22, and the like (lamp pattern data related to the instruction to the LED control board 72, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Has been done. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the lamp state information in the accessory effect interlocking request process (S907) of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). In S918, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the lamp state information (when the determination in S918 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S920.

In S918, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (when the determination in S918 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp accessory interlocking effect processing (S919). In the lamp accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 instructs the LED control board 72 so that the start timing and the end timing of the lamp effect by the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123 are synchronized. I do. For example, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the lamp pattern data A that constitutes the lamp effect sequence data A set in S914 and the first stop operation is the start condition is the interlocking lamp pattern data, the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc. are used in the lamp pattern data A. Instructs the LED control board 72 to light up. Further, when the operation end request related to the accessory pattern data A is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 uses the lamp pattern data A for the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22. The LED control board 72 is instructed to stop (end) the lighting of the lamps and the like. Even if the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the lamp pattern data B that constitutes the lamp effect sequence data B set in S914 and the first stop operation is the start condition is not the interlocking lamp pattern data, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction relating to the lamp pattern data B in S919. The process shifts to S920 without performing.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp effect sequence data update process (S920). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of each lamp pattern data constituting the set lamp effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 are determined by the lamp pattern data pattern. Etc. are instructed to light up on the LED control board 72. If the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking lamp pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the lamp status information, the sub CPU 102 lights the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold instructions. In this case, at the timing when the process shifts to S918 and S919 after the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction to turn on the lamp pattern data that has been held. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned lamp pattern data A. it can.

The other points of the lamp effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the lamp operation state information update process (S921). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the lamp state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S911.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The sound control task is a task of controlling the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

In S931 of the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the sound data registered in S516 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S932 (S931). If there is no registered sound data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S932.

In S932, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered sound data (S932). When it is determined that there is no sound data registered in S932 (when the determination in S932 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S935.

When it is determined that there is the sound data registered in S932 (when the determination in S932 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound effect sequence from the sound sequence table based on the extracted sound data (S933). The sound effect sequence is composed of data indicating an effect pattern related to sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R (data indicating a wav file name, various parameters, volume, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as sound pattern data). The sound effect sequence may be composed of a single sound pattern data or may be composed of a plurality of sound pattern data. The various parameters specify the corresponding channel number, the transfer rate per second of audio (kbps (kilo bits per second)), the presence / absence of loop playback, and the presence / absence of chain playback. Some of the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the sound effect sequence, for each sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence, is the pattern data the pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocking sound pattern data) related to the sound accessory interlocking effect (see S936) described later? It is configured to include data indicating whether or not it is. The sound effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of sound effect sequences, and associates sound data with sound effect sequences.

Further, in the sound production sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sound reproduction state information described later is added every time a predetermined period elapses after the instruction related to the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence is given. The marker data to be used is specified. For example, the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen is a sound that outputs a wav file name “effect sound C” for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds, with the start lever 16 operation as a start condition. It is a pattern. Further, the sound effect sequence C defines marker data 1 to 4 to be added to the sound reproduction state information described later every 1 second after the sub CPU 102 instructs the sound board 71 to output the effect sound C. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired sound effect sequence as sound effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S934).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (S935). The sound reproduction state information is information indicating the output state of the effect sound (sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71, the elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. .. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information in the character effect interlocking request process (S907) of the character control task (see FIG. 120). In S935, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (when the determination in S935 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S937.

In S935, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (when the determination in S935 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sound accessory interlocking effect processing (S936). In the sound accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 synchronizes the start timing and the end timing of the sound effect by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123. Give instructions to. For example, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound effect sequence data A set in S934 is configured and the sound pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking sound pattern data, the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A is sounded by the speakers 20L, 20R. Instructs the sound board 71 to output from. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 outputs the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A. Instruct the sound board 71 to stop (end). Even if the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound effect sequence data B set in S934 is configured and the sound pattern data B whose start condition is the first stop operation is not the interlocking sound pattern data, the sub CPU 102 issues an instruction related to the sound pattern data B in S936. The process shifts to S937 without performing the process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the sound effect sequence data update process (S937). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of the sound pattern data constituting the set sound effect sequence data is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the sound is output so as to output the effect sound with the pattern of the sound pattern data. Instruct the board 71. If the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking sound pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the sound playback state information, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect related to the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Holds the sound output instruction. In this case, at the timing when the processing shifts to S935 and S936 after the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction to output the effect sound related to the reserved sound pattern data. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking sound pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned sound pattern data A. it can.

The other points of the sound effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound reproduction state information update process (S938). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the sound reproduction state information. Further, when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 in S936 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sub CPU 102 performs the sound at predetermined time intervals. The marker data specified in the production sequence is added to the sound playback status information. For example, when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data C constituting the above-mentioned sound effect sequence C, the marker data 1 1 second after the instruction related to the sound pattern data C is given. , Marker data 2 after 2 seconds, marker data 3 after 3 seconds, and marker data 4 after 4 seconds have been added to the sound reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S931.

[Animation control task]
Next, the animation control task will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The animation control task is a task of controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2).

In S941 of the animation control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the animation data registered in S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S942 (S941). If there is no registered animation data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S942.

In S942, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered animation data (S942). When it is determined that there is no animation data registered in S942 (when the determination in S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S945.

When it is determined that there is the animation data registered in S942 (when the determination in S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the animation effect sequence associated with the animation data extracted from the plurality of animation effect sequences constituting the animation sequence table. (S943). The animation effect sequence is data indicating a pattern of effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) (data indicating a moving image file name to be played, playing time of a moving image, etc., hereinafter referred to as animation pattern data. There is). The animation effect sequence may be composed of a single animation pattern data or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of animation pattern data. Some of the animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence have a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data. The start conditions include, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the start of the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation. There are on (ON edge), release of pressing the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation off (OFF edge, display command reception), and payout. Further, in the animation effect sequence, regarding the animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence, whether or not the pattern data is pattern data (hereinafter, interlocking animation pattern data) related to the animation accessory interlocking effect (see S946) described later. It is configured to include data indicating the above. The animation effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of animation effect sequences, and associates animation data with the animation effect sequence.

Further, the animation effect sequence is configured to include data indicating whether or not the animation effect sequence is an animation effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image). Further, the production by the animation pattern data constituting the bonus final effect sequence is performed by sequentially playing back (displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11) a plurality of divided moving image data generated by dividing the series of moving image data. .. For example, the effect by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation effect sequence C, which is the bonus final effect sequence, is based on, for example, the divided moving image data 0 to 4 generated by dividing the moving image data for 5 seconds into 5 parts every 1 second. It is configured. Subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data, that is, in the above example, the divided moving image data 1 to 4 following the divided moving image data 0 are associated with different marker data described later. The reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 to 4 will be described in detail in the description of S950 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired animation effect sequence as animation effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S944).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (S945). The animation reproduction state information is information indicating the state of the video display (animation pattern data related to the instruction to the liquid crystal display device 11, the elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the animation reproduction state information in the character production interlocking request process (S907) of the character control task (see FIG. 120). In S945, when there is neither an operation start request nor an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (when the determination in S945 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S947.

In S945, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (when the determination in S945 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the animation accessory interlocking effect processing (S946). In the animation accessory interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 displays the liquid crystal display device 11 so that the start timing and the end timing of the animation effect by displaying the image on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the accessory effect by the rotating accessory 123 are synchronized. Give instructions to. For example, when the accessory pattern data A whose start condition is the first stop operation is the interlocking accessory pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation effect sequence data A set in S944 is configured and the animation pattern data B with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking animation pattern data, the image related to the animation pattern data B is displayed. Instruct the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 stops displaying the image related to the animation pattern data B. Instruct the liquid crystal display device 11 to (end). Further, when the accessory pattern data A with the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking accessory pattern and the operation start request is entered in the animation playback state information in S906 of the accessory control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation pattern data D for which the first stop operation is the start condition is not the interlocking animation pattern data, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation pattern data D in the process of S946 when the animation effect sequence data B set in S944 is configured. The process shifts to S947 without giving the instruction relating to.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the animation effect sequence data set in S944 is a bonus confirmation effect sequence, which is an animation effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image) (S947). When it is determined in S947 that the sequence is not the bonus confirmation effect sequence (when the determination in S947 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S951.

When it is determined in S947 that it is a bonus confirmation effect sequence (when the determination in S947 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S948).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is marker data in the sound reproduction state information (S949). When it is determined that there is no marker data (when the determination in S949 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S951.

When it is determined in S949 that there is marker data (YES in S949), the sub CPU 102 performs the bonus confirmation effect processing (S950). In this process, the sub CPU 102 reproduces any of the subsequent divided moving image data following the first divided moving image data related to the bonus confirmation effect sequence (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Each subsequent divided video data is associated with different marker data, and when the sound reproduction state information acquired in S948 includes marker data, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the subsequent divided video data corresponding to the marker data. .. For example, the divided moving image data 1 reproduced by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation effect sequence C described above is associated with the marker data 1 related to the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C described above. Similarly, the divided moving image data 2 is associated with the marker data 2, the divided moving image data 3 is associated with the marker data 3, and the divided moving image data 4 is associated with the marker data 4. When the sub CPU 102 includes the marker data 1 in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 starts the reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 when the divided moving image data 1 is not reproduced. Further, in the same case, when the divided moving image data 1 is being reproduced, the divided moving image data 1 is continuously reproduced. Similarly, when the sound reproduction state information includes any of the marker data 2 to 4, the sub CPU 102 starts reproduction of any of the associated divided moving image data 2 to 4. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of synchronization deviation between the display of the moving image related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen (moving image) and the output of the effect sound. The first display instruction of the divided moving image data (for example, the divided moving image data 0) is given in S951 described later, or in S946 when the animation pattern data of the bonus confirmation effect sequence is the interlocking animation pattern data. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation effect sequence data update process (S951). In this process, the correctness of the start condition of the animation pattern data constituting the set animation effect sequence data is determined, and when it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal display device displays the moving image related to the animation pattern data. Instruct 11. If the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is the interlocking animation pattern data and the operation start request has not yet been entered in the animation playback state information, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction regarding the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Withhold. In this case, the sub CPU 102 gives an instruction regarding the reserved animation pattern data at the timing when the process shifts to S945 and S946 after the operation start request is entered in the animation reproduction state information. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the effect related to the interlocking accessory pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned accessory pattern data A, and the effect related to the interlocking animation pattern data, for example, the effect related to the above-mentioned animation pattern data B. it can.

The other points of the animation effect sequence data update process are the same as those of the above-mentioned accessory effect sequence data update process (S905 in FIG. 120), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs animation reproduction state information update processing (S952). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the animation reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S941.

[Touch panel control task]
Next, the touch panel control task will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The touch panel control task is a task for managing the touch input unit 31a, and is performed by the sub CPU 102.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is received data (S961). Here, the received data is transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 (see FIG. 7) at a predetermined cycle, every 200 msec in this embodiment, and is received by the sub-control board 42 via the sub-relay board 67 (FIG. 7). It is the data to be done. The commands included in the received data include touch operation commands, flick operation commands, reset notification commands, and operation confirmation commands.

The touch operation command is a command included in the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when there is a touch operation. Here, the touch operation is an operation of touching a finger on the surface of the touch input unit 31a. The received data including the touch operation command also includes coordinate information related to the touch operation performed.

The flick operation command is a command included in the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the flick operation is performed. Here, the flick operation is an operation in which the surface of the touch input unit 31a is quickly flipped with a finger, that is, an operation in which the finger is moved by a predetermined distance or more in a short time while the finger is in contact with the surface. The received data including the flick operation command also includes the coordinate information related to the flick operation performed.

Further, the reset notification command is, for example, a touch sensor relay when a communication error occurs between the touch sensor relay board 73 and the touch input unit 31a and the touch sensor relay board 73 resets itself and the touch input unit 31a. This is a command included in the received data received from the board 73.

Further, the operation check command is received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the touch sensor relay board 73 does not receive an input signal from the touch input unit 31a, that is, when no operation is performed on the touch input unit 31a. This is a command included in the received data.
When a failure occurs in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, the received data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 may include an error code indicating the failure.

When it is determined in S961 that there is no received data (when the determination in S961 is NO), the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S961.

When it is determined in S961 that there is received data (when the determination in S961 is YES), it is determined whether or not the received data is normal (the received data does not include an error code) (S962). When it is determined in S962 that the received data is not normal (when the determination in S962 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the error history registration process (S963). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code "TP COM ERR" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S961.

The error code recorded in the predetermined area of the sub RAM is displayed on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129) described later. It can be referred to.

When it is determined in S962 that the received data is normal (when the determination in S962 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the touch panel input editing process (S964). In the touch panel input editing process, when the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 includes a touch operation command or a flick operation command a predetermined number of times in succession, or 288,000 times in the present embodiment, an error history is registered, etc. It is a process to perform. The details of the touch panel input editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. After the touch panel input editing process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S961.

[Touch panel input editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch panel input editing process of S964 in the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command included in the received data, that is, the received command (CMD) is an operation check command (S971). When it is determined in S971 that the command is an operation check command (when the determination in S971 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 0 to the operation command continuous count stored in the sub RAM 103 (S972). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S971 that it is not an operation check command (NO determination in S971), it is determined whether or not the received command is a touch operation command (S973).

When it is determined in S973 that the touch operation command is a touch operation command (when the determination in S973 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the touch operation XY coordinate data, which is the coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S974).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S975). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S973 that it is not a touch operation command (NO determination in S973), it is determined whether or not the received command is a flick operation command (S976).

When it is determined in S976 that the flick operation command is a flick operation command (when the determination in S976 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the flick operation XY coordinate data, which is the coordinate information in the received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S977).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S978). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

When it is determined in S976 that it is not a flick operation command (when the determination in S976 is NO), it is determined whether or not the receive command is a reset notification command (S979).

If it is determined in S979 that it is not a reset notification command (NO in S979), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S982.

When it is determined in S979 that it is a reset notification command (when the determination in S979 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S980). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP RST ??” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the operation command continuous counter (S981). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

In S982, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the operation command continuous counter stored in the sub RAM 103 exceeds 72000 (S982). When it is determined that the operation command continuous counter does not exceed 72000 (NO determination in S982), the sub CPU 102 ends the touch panel input editing process.

When it is determined in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 records the error code "TP LONG ON" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Then, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

The case where the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 is a case where the touch operation command or the flick operation command is continuously included 72,000 times in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73. That is, since the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 200 msec, in the above case, the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. It will be the case. However, usually, the touch operation or the flick operation is not performed for 4 hours. Therefore, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000, some trouble has occurred in the touch sensor relay board 73 or the touch input unit 31a, or the touch input unit 31a has a part or possession of the player's body. It is conceivable that the objects are still in contact with each other. Therefore, as described above, the sub CPU 102 records the error code “TP LONG ON” in the predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the warning screen on the main screen 111, and after 3 minutes have passed, displays the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 before the warning screen is displayed, and enables the game to be restarted. Further, the sub CPU 102 warns when the condition for setting the operation command continuous counter to 0 is satisfied within 3 minutes after the warning screen is displayed, that is, when the operation confirmation command is received or the reset notification command is received. The display of the screen is stopped, the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the game can be restarted.

[Hall Menu Task]
Next, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 102 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key has been turned from off to on (S991). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives the setting change start command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been turned from off to on.

When it is determined in S991 that the setting key is not turned on from off (when the determination in S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S991 again. That is, the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S991 until it determines that the setting key has been turned on.

In S991, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned on from off (when the determination in S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 128 on the main screen 111 (S992). ). As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 102 arranges a hall menu item area for displaying selectable hall menu items on the left side of the hall menu screen. Further, the sub CPU 102 arranges an operation explanation area for displaying the operation method at the time of displaying the hall menu screen below the hall menu item area.

In order to confirm various information / settings and change various settings, the operator operates the select button 29 and the enter button 28 (see FIG. 2) when the hall menu screen is displayed on the main screen 111. Then, select one of the hall menus displayed on the hall menu screen. The sub CPU 102 indicates in the operation explanation area that the position of the highlight display for designating one hall menu is changed by the select button 29 (menu selection) as an operation explanation. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the highlighted hall menu as an operation explanation in the operation explanation area as an enter button as a target hall menu for confirming various information / settings, changing various settings, deleting various information, and the like. 28 indicates that the selection (decision) is to be made.

Further, the sub CPU 102 has [time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], and [error information history], which are hall menus that can be selected on the hall menu screen, in the menu item area of the hall menu screen. , [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting], [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Accessory operation check], [LCD brightness setting processing], [Volume adjustment setting], 6 Items ([Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting]) are displayed in a rectangular button shape. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area in [time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], [error information history], [monitoring history], Display vertically in the order of [Warning display settings].

Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights [time setting], which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position on the hall menu screen at this time. Further, when the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the highlighted hall menu from [time setting] to [total medal information] located below it. Similarly, each time the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted, and at this time, the lowermost hall menu [warning display setting] is highlighted. When the select button 29 is pressed, the rectangular button-shaped hall menu items displayed in the menu item area are displayed in [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Character operation check], and [LCD]. Change to 7 items of [Brightness setting process] and [Volume adjustment setting]. Further, the sub CPU 102 sets the button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area to [Notification setting], [Power saving mode], "Maintenance", [Characteristic operation check], [Liquid crystal brightness setting process], [ Display in the order of [Volume adjustment setting] in the vertical direction.

Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights the "notification setting" which is the hall menu located at the uppermost position after changing the display of the menu item area, and lowers the hall menu which is highlighted each time the select button 29 is pressed. Change to the hall menu located in. Further, when the select button 29 is pressed while the [Volume adjustment setting], which is the hole menu located at the lowest position after changing the display of the menu item area, is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 displays the menu item area. Change the displayed hall menu items to [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], and [Warning display setting] (return to before change). ..

After the hall menu display processing of S992 shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 102 performs the hall menu processing (S993). The hall menu processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting key has been turned off (S994). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives the setting change end command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key has been turned from on to off.

When it is determined in S994 that the setting key is not turned from on to off (when the determination in S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S993.

In S994, when it is determined that the setting key has changed from on to off (when the determination in S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in the hall menu process (S993) (S995). ..

When it is determined in S995 that the setting change has been made (when the determination in S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the setting change initialization process (S996) and shifts the process to S997. On the other hand, when it is determined in S995 that the setting has not been changed (when the determination in S995 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S997.

In S997, the sub CPU 102 performs a game screen return display process (S997). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 an image for effect to be displayed when playing a game and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S991 after the processing of S997.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (S993) in the hall menu task (see FIG. 127) will be described with reference to FIG. 129.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a hall menu selection process for selecting a hall menu that is a target for confirming various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 29 and the enter button 28 by the operator (S1001). ).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [time setting] (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the selected hall menu is [time setting] (when the determination in S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the time setting process (S1003). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a time setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the time set.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [time setting] (NO determination is made in S1002), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [total medal information] (S1004). .. When it is determined that the selected hole menu is [total medal information] (YES in S1004), the sub CPU 102 performs total medal information processing (S1005). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a total medal information screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 so that the operator can confirm the total medal information.

When it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [total medal information] (when S1004 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in S1001 is [setting change / confirmation history]. (S1006). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [setting change / confirmation history] (when the determination in S1006 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the setting change / confirmation history processing (S1007). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIG. 132) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm the setting confirmation history, change history, and browsing history. Further, when it is detected that the enter button 28 is operated while the select button 29 is operated and the [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 sets a value on the main screen 111. The setting change confirmation history screen 116b (see FIG. 133) including the above is displayed, and the operator is informed of the setting (setting value) confirmation history, setting (setting value) change history, browsing history, confirmed setting (setting value), and change. The settings (set values) that have been set can be confirmed. The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 130 to 134.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [setting change / confirmation history] (when S1006 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [error information history]. (S1008). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Error information history] (YES in S1008), the sub CPU 102 performs error information history processing (S1009). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays the error information history screen shown in FIG. 135 on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to check or change the error information history.

As shown in FIG. 135, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a cancellation date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. In addition, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, a cursor (not shown) that specifies an arbitrary line on the error information history screen is moved by pressing the select button 29 (“cursor movement”), and the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time. Delete the error code etc. displayed on the line specified by the cursor with ("Clear data"), and press the enter button 28 to end the display of the error information history screen ("Back"). The fact is displayed.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Error information history] (NO in S1008), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Monitoring history] (S1010). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [monitoring history] (YES in S1010), the sub CPU 102 performs the monitoring history processing (S1011). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm the monitoring history.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [monitoring history] (NO is determined in S1010), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [warning display setting] (S1012). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [warning display setting] (YES in S1012), the sub CPU 102 performs the warning display setting process (S1013). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to check and change the warning display setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [warning display setting] (NO determination is made in S1012), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [notification setting] (S1014). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Notification setting] (YES in S1014), the sub CPU 102 performs the notification setting process (S1015). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the notification setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Notification setting] (NO is determined in S1014), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Power saving mode] (S1016). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the [power saving mode] (when the determination in S1016 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the power saving mode processing (S1017). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the power saving mode setting.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [power saving mode] (NO determination is made in S1016), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [maintenance] (S1018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Maintenance] (YES in S1018), the sub CPU 102 performs maintenance processing (S1019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Maintenance] (NO in S1018), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Character operation check] (S1020). .. When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [accessory operation confirmation] (YES in S1020), the sub CPU 102 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (S1021). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays the accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [confirmation of accessory operation] (when S1020 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [LCD brightness setting] ( S1022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [LCD brightness setting] (YES in S1022), the sub CPU 102 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and allows the operator to confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 11.

When it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [LCD brightness setting] (NO determination is made in S1022), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [Volume adjustment setting] (S1024). ). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [Volume adjustment setting] (YES in S1024), the sub CPU 102 performs the volume adjustment setting process (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the setting of the volume of the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

After processing S1003, s1005, S1007, S1009, S1011, S1013, S1015, S1017, S1019, S1021, S1023, S1025, and when it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Volume adjustment setting] (S1024 is NO determination). ), The sub CPU 102 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to S994 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 127).

[Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (S1007) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129) will be described with reference to FIG. 130.
In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the history of setting change of setting value, the history of confirmation of setting value, and the browsing history of setting change and confirmation are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as setting change confirmation history information. First, setting change, confirmation, and browsing in this embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the setting change means that the setting key is operated (rotated to the right), the current set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 23, and then the reset button (not shown) is operated. While increasing or decreasing the set value displayed on the segment display 23 in the range of "1" to "6", the set value displayed is operated by operating the start lever 16 when the desired set value is reached. To determine. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting change mode on the condition that the setting key is turned on from off in the power off state, and the setting value can be changed. The setting value is confirmed when it is detected that the start lever 16 has been operated or when it is detected that the setting key has been turned from on to off.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU 93 makes the above-mentioned setting changes, inputs a signal generated from the setting key type switch 52 by operating the setting key, and then operates the start lever 16. Upon receiving the signal indicating that, the data indicating that the setting change has been made and the setting change end command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 102. The main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment constitutes a control unit that controls the game according to the present invention. The main CPU 93 also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU 93 is a setting change end command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU 102 includes operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed. The date and time data currently timed by the RTC 109, that is, the date and time data for receiving the setting change end command indicating that the setting change has been made, is stored in the backup memory 108 as the setting change confirmation history information. The setting change confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the setting change confirmation history information corresponding to the history numbers 3, 5, and 8 in the setting change / confirmation history table displayed in FIG. 133, which will be described later. The sub CPU 102 according to the present embodiment constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit according to the present invention. Further, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In the present embodiment, the confirmation of the set value means that the setting key is operated (rotated to the right) and the current set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 23 based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch 52. To do. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the setting key is turned on from off in the power-on state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 23. The setting key type switch 52 according to the present embodiment constitutes a setting means that enables change or confirmation of a set value together with the main CPU 93.

In order to be able to display the history of confirmation of the set value, the main CPU 93 confirms the set value by the above-mentioned operation, and when the signal generated from the setting key type switch 52 is input by the operation of the setting key, the set value is displayed. The data indicating that the above is confirmed and the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU 102.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU 93 is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU 102 includes operation type information (information indicating the setting confirmation) indicating that the set value is confirmed. The date and time data currently timed by the RTC 109, that is, the date and time data for which the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received, is stored in the backup memory 108 as the setting change confirmation history information. The setting change confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the setting change confirmation history information corresponding to the history numbers 4, 6 and 7 in the setting change / confirmation history table in FIG. 133. The backup memory 108 according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state according to the present invention. The RTC 109 according to the present embodiment constitutes a sundial time means for clocking the date and time according to the present invention.

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the setting key is operated (rotated to the right), and [setting change / confirmation history] in the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is highlighted. On condition that the enter button 28 is pressed in this state, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 is displayed as, for example, the setting change confirmation / history table shown in FIG. 133. Say. The liquid crystal display device 11 according to the present embodiment constitutes a display unit for displaying various images according to the present invention.

In order to be able to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 102 displays the hall menu on the liquid crystal display device 11 and displays the hall menu on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the setting key is operated (rotated to the right) during the above-mentioned browsing. When [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified, the item is highlighted (see FIG. 132). When the enter button 28 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 102 reads the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 and displays the setting change / confirmation history table (see FIG. 133) on the liquid crystal display device 11. indicate. The enter button 28 according to the present embodiment, together with the select button 29 described later, constitutes an operation unit that receives various operations according to the present invention.

In addition to the enter button 28 and the select button 29, the pachislot machine 1 includes a touch center module 31, a BET switch 62, a start switch 64, a touch panel maintenance screen 115, a setting key type switch 52, a volume switch 107, and a reset switch (not available). It has an operating means such as (shown). Of these, in addition to the enter button 28 and the select button 29, the touch center module 31, the BET switch 62, the start switch 64, and the touch panel maintenance screen 115 are provided on the outside (front side) of the front door 2b, and at least the player can use them. It is an operation unit that can be operated. On the other hand, the setting key type switch 52, the volume switch 107, and the reset switch (not shown) are operation units provided inside (rear side) of the front door 2b and cannot be operated by the player. The operation unit according to the present invention as used herein corresponds to an operation unit such as an enter button 28 and a select button 29 that can be operated by at least a player. On the other hand, the volume switch 107 corresponds to a non-game operation unit that is not operated by the player.

The sub CPU 102 receives the setting change start command transmitted when the main CPU 93 inputs a signal generated from the setting key type switch 52 by the operation of the setting key after the above browsing is performed, and then the enter button 28 presses. When a signal indicating that an operation has been performed (data indicating that browsing has been performed) is input, operation type information indicating that browsing has been performed (information indicating browsing) and date and time data currently timed by RTC109 That is, the date and time data in which the data indicating that the browsing has been performed is stored in the backup memory 108 as the browsing history. At this time, for example, the sub CPU 102 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change confirmation history information and stores it in the backup memory 108. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the setting change confirmation history information corresponding to the history numbers 1 and 2 in the setting change / confirmation history table displayed in FIG. 133.

Here, the case where the setting value can be confirmed and the setting change / confirmation history table (see FIG. 133) is stored as the browsing history has been described, but the setting value is not displayed. The setting change / confirmation history table (Fig. 133). 132) may be stored as a browsing history. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the setting change / confirmation history table shown in FIG. 132 can be displayed when the setting key is operated regardless of whether the power is turned on or off. Therefore, it is possible to generate a browsing history by detecting that the setting key is operated and the setting change / confirmation history table can be displayed.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing according to the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 performs setting display control for displaying the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108. That is, the sub CPU 102 according to the present embodiment constitutes the set value storage means and the set display means in the display control unit according to the present invention. When the data received by the data receiving means is changed or confirmed, the set value storage means changes the setting or confirms the setting in the storage holding storage area, and changes the setting and the date and time data from the sundial means. Store as confirmation history information. The setting display means displays the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit. As a result, the display control unit displays the set value stored in the storage holding storage area when the operation unit is operated while the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the setting display means.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. Before explaining FIG. 130, first, the setting change / confirmation history screen used in the setting change / confirmation history processing, and the display control function thereof will be described. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a of the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 132 is a setting change confirmation history on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the detail of information. Further, FIG. 133 is a diagram showing details of the setting change confirmation history information on the setting change confirmation history screen 116b in which the setting value in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is displayed.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 131 on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108. As shown in FIG. 131, the sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111. The setting change / confirmation history table area is arranged in the approximate center of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a, and the hall menu item area for displaying selectable hall menu items is arranged on the left side of the hall menu screen. Below, an operation explanation area for displaying the operation method when the hall menu screen is displayed is arranged. The sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 132 in the setting change / confirmation history table area.

Further, as described above, the sub CPU 102 has 6 items ([time setting], [total medal information], among all the selection items of the hall menu that can be selected on the hall menu screen, in the hall menu item area of the hall menu screen. ], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting]) are displayed in a rectangular button shape. Further, when the press of the select button 29 is detected, the sub CPU 102 can change and display in order from the [time setting] at the top of the hall menu to be highlighted to the [warning display setting] located at the bottom. It has become.

These items can be specified to be selected by a cursor that moves one item at a time by operating (pressing) the select button 29, for example. The sub CPU 102 highlights the item selected and designated by pressing the select button 29. In FIG. 131, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu and is highlighted. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays an operation method when the setting change confirmation history screen 116a is displayed in the operation explanation area at the lower left of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a.

As shown in FIG. 132, the setting change confirmation history information that does not include the setting (setting value) displayed on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a includes the history number (No), the setting change / confirmation date and time, and each operation item. Consists of columns. Each column of the history number column is a column in which a number indicating the order of the setting change / confirmation history is added in ascending order from the latest history. Therefore, the row with the lowest number in the history number column is the latest history information, and the larger the number, the older the history information. The setting change / confirmation date / time column is a column indicating the date / time data in which the setting change / confirmation / viewing was performed. The operation column is a column indicating the operation type.

In the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 132, the history information when the setting value of the setting value is changed is displayed corresponding to the lines of the history numbers 3, 5, and 8, respectively. Specifically, "change" data indicating that the operation type is a setting change, and "2016/01/01 00:15:28" and "2016/01/01" indicating the time when the setting change was made. The data of "01 00:09:35" and "2016/01/01 00:07:45" are displayed in association with each other.

Further, in the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 132, the history information when the setting change is confirmed is displayed corresponding to the lines 4, 6 and 7 of the history number, respectively. Specifically, "confirmation" data indicating that the operation type is confirmation, and "2016/01/01 00:09:48" and "2016/01/01 00:" indicating the time when the confirmation was performed. The data of "08:01" and "2016/01/01 00:07:50" are displayed in association with each other.

Further, in the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 132, the history information when the setting change and confirmation history is browsed is displayed corresponding to the lines of the history numbers 1 and 2, respectively. Specifically, "browsing" data indicating that the operation type is browsing, and "2016/01/01 00:15:33" and "2016/01/01 00:" indicating the time when the browsing was performed. The data of "15:30" is displayed in association with each other.

As for the setting change confirmation history information (including the setting value), the history of each line is stored in the backup memory 108 in association with the setting value, and as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the sub CPU 102 starts from the backup memory 108. It is read out and displayed on the main screen 111 as a setting change confirmation history screen 116a in a predetermined display format. Here, the sub CPU 102 is in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and specified in the hall menu item area and is highlighted, that is, when "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected (enter button is displayed). (Not pressed), only the operation type of change, confirmation and browsing is displayed in the "Operation" column of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the setting value when the operation is performed is not displayed. It has become. In this way, the sub CPU 102 changes the setting stored in the backup memory 108, confirms or browses the setting, and displays the date and time data on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the setting change confirmation history screen 116a displays an operation method when the setting change confirmation history screen 116a is displayed in the operation explanation area at the lower left of the setting change confirmation history information. That is, as the above operation method, the sub CPU 102 displays that when the select button 29 is operated (pressed), the cursor for selecting and designating the selection item of the home menu is moved one by one in order. Further, when the enter button 28 is operated, the sub CPU 102 displays that the item selected and specified by the cursor on the home menu is selected (hereinafter, also referred to as “decision”). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays that when the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time, the screen returns to the hall menu screen (see FIG. 128) (is redisplayed).

The sub CPU 102 has an enter button when "setting change / confirmation history" in the home menu is selected and specified (highlighted) while the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 is being displayed. When it is detected that 28 is pressed, the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 133 is displayed on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11 instead of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a.

At this time, the sub CPU 102 reads the setting change confirmation history information from the backup memory 108 when the press of the enter button 28 is detected, and displays the setting change confirmation history information on the main screen 111 in the same display format as the setting change confirmation history screen 116a. .. Here, the sub CPU 102 displays the operation type of the operation and the set value when the operation is performed in association with each other in the "operation" column of the setting change confirmation history information. In this way, the sub CPU 102 displays the set value stored in the backup memory 108 when the enter button 28 constituting the operation unit is operated while the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. It has become.

Specifically, in the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 133, for the history corresponding to the history numbers 3, 5 and 8, the operation type is the setting change and the setting changed setting values are 6, 1 and 2. The data of "change_6", "change_1", and "change_2" indicating that the setting is changed, and "2016/01/01 00:15:28" and "2016/01" indicating the time when the setting change was made. The data of "/ 01 00:09:35" and "2016/01/01 00:07:45" are displayed in association with each other.

Further, in the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 133, it is determined that the operation type is confirmed and the confirmed setting values are 1, 2, and 2 for the history corresponding to the history numbers 4, 6, and 7, respectively. The data of "confirmation_1", "confirmation_2", and "confirmation_1" to be shown, and "2016/01/01 00:09:48" and "2016/01/01 00:08" to indicate the time when the confirmation was made. The data of ": 01" and "2016/01/01 00:07:50" are displayed in association with each other.

Further, in the setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 133, for the history corresponding to the history numbers 1 and 2, as in FIG. 132, the data of "browsing" indicating that the operation type is browsed and the browsing are performed. The data of "2016/01/01 00:15:33" and "2016/01/01 00:15:30" indicating the time of day are displayed in association with each other.

The setting change confirmation history information shown in FIG. 132 is stored in the backup memory 108 in association with the history of each line, and is read from the backup memory 108 by the sub CPU 102 to hide the setting value in a predetermined display format. It is displayed on the main screen 111.

In the example of FIG. 133 (the same applies to FIG. 132), the setting change confirmation history information is displayed for one page in units of eight, that is, only 1/1 page of the setting change confirmation history information is displayed, but the backup memory 108 In general, more than that number (for example, N pages) of setting change confirmation history information is stored in. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 scrolls 1 / N (for example, N is the number of pages 1 to 16) of the displayed setting change confirmation history information (see FIG. 133) for more than eight history information. After that, the history information can be scrolled and displayed even for the range up to the N / N page. That is, in the present embodiment, the page break is performed when the highlight display is selected up to the bottom line by operating the cursor.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, in the setting change confirmation history screen 116b, the operation method when the setting change confirmation history screen 116b including the scrolling of the above-mentioned page is displayed in the operation explanation area at the lower left of the setting change confirmation history information is displayed. It has a displayable configuration.

That is, when the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 moves the cursor for selecting and specifying the history of each line of the setting change confirmation history information one item at a time as an operation method when the setting change confirmation history screen 116b is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays that when the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time, the setting change confirmation history information is collectively deleted. Further, when the enter button 28 is operated, the sub CPU 102 displays that the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132) is returned (redisplayed). The sub CPU 102 may display that when the enter button 28 is operated, the screen returns to the 1st / Nth page.

Based on the above-mentioned setting change confirmation history screens 116a and 116b and the display control function of the sub CPU 102, the setting change / confirmation process (S1007) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) will be described below with reference to FIG. 130. ..

This setting change / confirmation history processing is described in more detail when [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed in S1006 of FIG. 129 (when the determination in S1006 is YES). Detects that the enter button 28 is pressed while [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected (highlighted) on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132). It starts on the condition that it is done.

When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU 102 first performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing for displaying the setting change confirmation history screen 116b shown in FIG. 133 (S1051). As shown in FIG. 133, the setting change confirmation history screen 116b displays the setting change confirmation history information in which the operation type of the operation and the setting value when the operation is performed are displayed in association with each other in the "operation" column. It is a thing.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in S1051, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 has been operated and the last line has been reached (S1052). Here, when the select button 29 is operated and it is determined that it is the last line (when the determination in S1052 is YES), the page update process for continuing the scrolling of the page is performed (S1053). The sub CPU 102 detects that the select button 29 has been operated, and the highlighted cursor that selects and specifies the history of each line of the setting change confirmation history information is moved in order line by line, and the last line. When the highlight is displayed in, the next page is displayed (however, when the setting change confirmation history information for N pages is stored). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the first page of 1 / N when the highlight is displayed on the last line of the last page of the N / N.

On the other hand, when the select button 29 is operated and it is determined that it is not the last line (when the determination in S1052 is NO), then, in the sub CPU 102, the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time. It is determined whether or not there is (S1054). Here, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1054 is YES), all the setting change / confirmation history data stored in the backup memory 108 are cleared (when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time). Batch deletion) and (S1055) end the process.

Further, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1054 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the enter button 28 is pressed (S1056).

If it is determined that the enter button 28 is not pressed (NO in S1056), the processing after S1052 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 28 is pressed (when the determination in S1056 is YES), the setting change confirmation history screen 116a is displayed instead of the setting change confirmation history screen 116b shown in FIG. 133. Return to (see FIG. 132) and end this process. In the present embodiment, when S1056 is determined to be YES, the display is returned to the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 132. However, when S1056 is determined to be YES, the display state of the 1st / Nth page (1 / Nth page display state ( It may be returned to FIG. 133), and when the unoperated state of the select button 29 and the enter button 28 has elapsed for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds or more), the display may be returned to the setting change confirmation history screen 116a.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing a procedure for confirming a set value in the setting change confirmation history information of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 134, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the first procedure of confirming the set value in the setting change confirmation history information, the main screen 111 is operated by operating the setting key with the front door 2b open. Display the hall menu. The setting key can be turned on by turning the setting key in one direction (see FIG. 7), and the setting key can be turned on in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). The type switch 52 can be turned off.

As a second procedure, the pachislot machine 1 has the "setting change / confirmation history" selected and specified in the hall menu on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132). "Confirmation history" is highlighted, and the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (Fig. 131) including the date and time data and the setting change confirmation history information showing only the corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing. , See FIG. 132).

As the third step, in the pachislot 1, the enter button 28 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a displayed in the second step. Display the setting change confirmation history screen 116b (see FIG. 133). On the setting change confirmation history screen 116b, the date and time data and the fixed change / confirmation history information associated with the corresponding operation type and setting value of setting change, confirmation, and browsing are displayed.

Therefore, a person who has the authority to use and operate the setting key can see the setting change / confirmation history table on the setting change confirmation history screen 116b displayed through the first to third steps above, and the ball output rate. It will be possible to check at a glance each history of setting changes, confirmation of setting changes, viewing of setting changes and confirmations, and corresponding setting values that specify (including the winning probability of replay). The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachislot 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 11 for displaying various images, operation units such as an enter button 28 and a select button 29, and a control unit for controlling games. The main CPU 93 and the sub CPU 102, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, are provided, and the control unit enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting key type switch 52 which is a setting means and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 102 are provided, and the display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. A backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 93 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a setting value to the sub CPU 102 by a data transmission means. Then, when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 102 sets the setting change or setting confirmation in the backup memory 108, and sets the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 109 as the setting change confirmation history information. The enter button 28 is provided with a setting display function that stores and displays the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Has a configuration in which the set value stored in the backup memory 108 is displayed when is operated.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 109 are stored in the backup memory 108 as the setting change confirmation history information. Therefore, the enter button is displayed in the state where the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When 28 is operated, the set value stored in the backup memory 108 can be displayed. Therefore, when the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment may have a configuration in which the date and time data for which the set value is received is acquired from the RTC109, and the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC109, and store the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. ..

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108, and when the setting value and the date and time data are displayed, the displayed date and time data is displayed. The browsing history may be stored in the backup memory 108 and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history. Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed is selected, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change confirmation history information and the display of the setting value and the date / time data, the browsing is performed. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change confirmation history information corresponding to the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data, so that each history related to the setting value can be confirmed and is invalid. It is possible to provide a pachi-slot machine 1 capable of determining whether or not various setting changes or setting confirmations have been made.

Further, the pachislot 1 constituting the game machine according to the present invention is a main unit that controls a game, including a liquid crystal display device 11 that displays various images, operation units such as an enter button 28 and a select button 29, and the like. A CPU 93 and a sub CPU 102 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11 are provided, and the control unit is a setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A key-type switch 52 for setting and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 102 are provided, and the display control unit includes a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 93 is provided with a backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 93 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a setting value to the sub CPU 102 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the CPU 102 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 109 as the setting change confirmation history information in the backup memory 108. When the setting display function for displaying the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11 is provided and the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. It has a configuration in which date and time data is stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display unit. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 from the RTC109, and stores the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108, and when the setting value and the date and time data are displayed, the displayed date and time data is displayed. The browsing history may be stored in the backup memory 108 and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 11. Therefore, in the state where the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed is selected, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change confirmation history information and the display of the setting value and the date / time data, the browsing is performed. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation history information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data can be saved and displayed, so that an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed. Not only can it be determined whether or not it is, but it is also possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Maintenance process]
Next, the maintenance process (S1019) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 and the touch panel maintenance screen 115 shown in FIG. 137 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the MAX bet button 24, 1BET button 25, stop button 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, Various operating devices such as the select button 29 that can be operated by the player, various internal devices such as the hopper device 43 and reels 3L, 3C, and 3R arranged inside the pachislot 1, and various sensors provided in the medal selector 46. It is possible to have the operator confirm whether or not the sensor and various peripheral devices such as the touch input unit 31a operate normally. In the following description, various peripheral devices other than various operation devices, various internal devices, various sensors, and the touch input unit 31a may be collectively referred to as various devices.

As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operating status of various devices on the maintenance screen 114. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the touch panel maintenance screen 115 below the partition piece on the main screen 111 and over the sub screen 113.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operation status display table shown in FIG. 138 at substantially the center of the maintenance screen 114. The operation status display table includes a name string in which the names of the 23 various devices are displayed, a number string in which the serial numbers (1 to 23) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed, and a number string. It has an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the MAX bet button 14 is pressed while the maintenance screen 114 is displayed, the sub CPU 102 changes the display of the operation status column of the MAX bet button 14 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red.

Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the operation method at the time of displaying the maintenance screen 114 at the lower left of the maintenance screen 114. Specifically, when the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the hall menu screen (FIG. 128) is returned (redisplayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 102 displays a cross-shaped grid line G composed of a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. When the display of the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is started, the sub CPU 102 sets the grid line G at the intersection of the vertical line and the horizontal line constituting the grid line G (hereinafter, may be referred to as an intersection of the grid line G) as the sub screen 113. It is displayed so that it is placed at the initial position set on the upper right of. Further, when a finger touches the touch input unit 31a, as shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 102 arranges the display position of the grid line G and the intersection of the grid lines G at the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a. Change to. That is, the sub CPU 102 changes the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at a position corresponding to the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a on the sub screen 113. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining the state of touching the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger.

Further, when the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 sets the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position. change.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 136), first, the sub CPU 102 acquires non-operation command data from the main CPU 93 (S1031). The no-operation command here is the main input indicating whether the operation status display table shown in FIG. 138 is an on state in which there is an input from various devices assigned serial numbers 1 to 18 or an off state in which there is no input. It includes state information and is transmitted from the main CPU 93 every 4 msec.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a main input state information editing process for reading the main input state information in the acquired non-operation command data (S1032).

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the sub device input information (S1033). The sub-device input information is information transmitted at predetermined intervals from various devices and touch input units 31a assigned serial numbers 19 to 23 in the operation status display table shown in FIG. 138. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input. Further, the sub-input state information in the sub-device input information transmitted from the touch input unit 31a includes the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a (XY coordinates when the initial position is 0,0). It has been.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (S1034).

Next, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 (see FIGS. 137 and 138) above the partition piece 112 on the main screen 111 based on the main input state information read in S1032 and the sub input state information read in S1034. Performs maintenance screen display processing to be displayed in (S1035). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen 114 and the update of the display (for example, the change from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a touch panel maintenance screen display process for displaying the touch panel maintenance screen 115 on the sub screen 113 based on the sub input state information read in S1034 (S1036). In this process, the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed and updated (for example, the display position of the grid line G is changed).

Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are operated at the same time (S1037). When it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are operated at the same time (when the determination in S1037 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 129), and performs the process in the hall menu task (see FIG. 129). Return to S994 (see FIG. 127).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not operated at the same time (when the determination in S1037 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S1031.

[OFF edge execution when a button is selected in the touch input section]
In the present embodiment, when the operator uses the touch input unit 31a to select an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge. The OFF edge execution means that the sub CPU 102 detects the selection of the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. In the present embodiment, detecting the selection of the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub CPU 102 touches the touch input unit 31a with a finger is referred to as ON edge execution.
Hereinafter, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 140 to 146.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 is a function of linking the pachislot 1 and the mobile terminal.
By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of pachislot 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, the determination of a specific small winning combination (internal winning combination) in succession, the execution of a specific effect, and the like. In addition, as a function to customize the function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1, for example, the music output during the first ART (pseudo-bonus) or the second ART (ART) is made into a special song. It is possible to change or change the costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. When the enter button 28 or the select button 29 is pressed while the unit game is completed, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.

FIG. 140 shows a state in which the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)" and "Please select your favorite menu".

As shown in FIG. 140, when the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of guide menus are displayed on the guide menu screen. The items in the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Arrangement / Dividend", "Model Site", and "Return to Game". Each guide menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with the character string of the item name arranged in the center.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 143). When "Arrangement / Dividend" is selected, the arrangement / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, the registration code for the model site is displayed on the main screen 111.

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image on the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu on the sub screen 113 are terminated. Then, on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113, an image for effect to be displayed when playing a game and an initial image to be displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period are displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without touching any of the items in the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 have a predetermined image for production and a pachislot machine 1 to be displayed when playing a game. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a period is displayed.

When the guide menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 executes an OFF edge that detects that each guide menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a. .. Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the guide menu displayed at the position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the position where the player's finger is touching on the touch input unit 31a to be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus. .. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 highlights the buttons of the target guide menu so that they can be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus. Instead of the highlight display, the button of the target guide menu may be enlarged and displayed so that it can be distinguished from the buttons of other guide menus.

For example, as shown in FIG. 141, the position corresponding to the position where the “arrangement / payout” of the guide menu of the sub screen 113 is displayed on the touch input unit 31a (in the present embodiment, the guide menu “arrangement” is displayed. When a finger is touched at a position facing the "dividend" in the front-rear direction, the sub CPU 102 highlights the "arrangement / dividend" of the guide menu, that is, illuminates the "arrangement / dividend" of the guide menu. In this state, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "arrangement / payout" in the guide menu.

With the guide menu "Arrangement / Payout" highlighted, the position corresponding to the position where the guide menu "Arrangement / Payout" is displayed without the player taking his or her finger off the touch input unit 31a. When the finger is moved out, the sub CPU 102 ends the highlighting of "Arrangement / Dividend" in the guide menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that the player has selected "Arrangement / Payout" in the guide menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 142, when the player moves his finger to a position corresponding to the position where "Start Unimemo" in the guide menu is displayed, the sub CPU 102 "Starts Unimemo" in the guide menu. To highlight. Then, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a in this state, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "Start Unimemo" in the guide menu.
That is, unless the player releases his / her finger from the touch input unit 31a, the player displays the display on the sub screen 113 at a position corresponding to the position outside the position where the touch input unit 31a is first touched (in the present embodiment, the player faces the front-back direction). You can select the guide menu that is available.

The specific operation of the sub CPU 102 when the guide menu screen as described above is displayed on the sub screen 113 will be described. First, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player touches the touch input unit 31a and the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched (the operation XY coordinate data described above). Next, the sub CPU 102 displays a guide menu at a position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the detected position coordinates (in the present embodiment, a position facing the position where the player's finger is touched in the front-rear direction). If so, highlight the button in the guide menu. Further, the sub CPU 102 acquires the position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched at a predetermined cycle, every 50 msec in the present embodiment. Then, when the sub CPU 102 detects that the player's finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 determines the last acquired position coordinates as the selection coordinates, and guides the menu to a position corresponding to the selection coordinates on the sub screen 113. Is displayed, it detects that the guide menu has been selected by the player.

FIG. 143 shows a state in which the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The initial image of Unimemo includes the characters "Unimemo" and "Customize your favorite character".

As shown in FIG. 143, when the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the uni-memo menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. Multiple Unimemo menus are displayed on the Unimemo menu screen. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to the game", and "return". Each Unimemo menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with the character string of the item name arranged in the center. When the uni-memo menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 indicates that each uni-memo menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a is separated from the touch input unit 31a. To detect.

When "password input" is selected, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 144).

FIG. 144 shows a state in which the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The password display image contains the characters "Enter password".

As shown in FIG. 144, when the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. Multiple password input menus are displayed on the password input menu screen. The items of the password input menu include "OK", "Delete", "0" to "9", "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Back". Each password input menu is displayed in the shape of a rectangular button with a character string of the item name arranged in the center.

When selected from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" in the password input menu, the selected characters are input and displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the last entered character is deleted from the password display image.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 display an image for production to be displayed when playing a game and when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period of time. The initial image to be displayed is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 are designated with a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and a pachislot machine 1. The initial image to be displayed when the operation is not performed for a period is displayed. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the Unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 113 (see FIG. 143).

When the password input menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 detects that each password menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a leaves the touch input unit 31a, as described above. To do. For example, as shown in FIG. 144, when the player touches a position on the touch input unit 31a corresponding to the position where "E" of the password input menu is displayed (opposing in the front-rear direction), the sub The CPU 102 highlights "E" in the password input menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 145, when the player moves his finger on the touch input unit 31a to a position corresponding to the position where "F" of the password input menu is displayed, the sub CPU 102 inputs the password. Exit the highlighting of "E" in the menu and highlight "F" in the password entry menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that "E" in the password input menu is selected by the player. Further, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a while "F" of the password input menu is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 is selected by the player as "F" of the password input menu. Detect that. Then, as shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 102 displays "F" related to the detection of selection on the password display image.

[First action]
In the present embodiment, the pullback is performed in the ART pullback process by performing the above-mentioned ART in-process (see FIG. 105), ART pullback process (FIG. 107), and display command reception time process (see FIG. 116). After that, in the game performed until the predetermined winning number for which the stop order is notified is won, as long as the stop operation is performed by pressing forward ("left middle right" and "left and right middle"), the sub of the sub control circuit 101 The CPU 102 does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter (see S614 in FIG. 107, S808 in FIG. 116, S584 in FIG. 105, and S585). Even in a game in which the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted, the sub CPU 102 performs an additional game number lottery (S583 during ART processing shown in FIG. 105) for each game.
In addition, in a game performed between the pullback in the ART pullback process and the winning of a predetermined winning number in which the stop order is notified (hereinafter, may be referred to as "navigation"), other than the forward push. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in the stop order of, the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. (See S614 in FIG. 107, S808 in FIG. 116, S584, S585 in FIG. 105).

Therefore, when the stop operation is not performed by pressing forward between navigations, the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0" earlier than when the stop operation is performed by pressing forward. Therefore, the number of times the number of additional games is drawn is reduced. That is, when the stop operation is not performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigation systems, the chance of adding the number of games to the ART game counter can be reduced as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order. it can. Therefore, a penalty can be generated when the stop operations are not performed in a predetermined stop order between navigations.

Further, "50" is set in the ART game number counter regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order between the navigation systems (see S612 in FIG. 107). That is, the number of games staying in the second ART is guaranteed to be at least "50". Therefore, an excessive penalty is not imposed on the player who unintentionally performs the stop operation in a stop order different from the forward push. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push in the game performed between the navigations, the game is started from the next game of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. The mode in which the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game has been described. However, instead of this, the value of the ART game number counter may be subtracted by "1" for each game from the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward push. In this case, a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the ART game number counter similar to that of S585 in the ART process (see FIG. 105) is added between S809 and S810 of the display command reception process (see FIG. 116). ..

[Second action]
Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order and an assist state different from the selected assist state occurs, that is, the sub-game state is in the pseudo bonus and is pseudo. When the bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77, set to on in S819 of the penalty determination process shown in FIG. 117) is on, in S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data is set. The lamp pattern data is changed to a full lighting pattern that lights without blinking. Therefore, it is possible to make the person who sees the pachislot 1 recognize that the stop operation has been performed in a stop order different from the notified stop order. That is, in the game during the first ART (pseudo-bonus), when the reel lamp 22 is lit without blinking when the display command is received, the person who sees the pachislot 1 has a stop order different from the notified stop order. It is possible to recognize that the stop operation has been performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 changes the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 to the full lighting pattern has been described. However, the mode of changing the lamp data related to the reel lamp 22 is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set within a range distinguishable from the case of lighting with the lamp pattern data before the change. For example, the sub CPU 102 may change the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 to a total extinguishing pattern that turns off the lamp pattern data without turning it on. Further, the lamp pattern data related to the change is not limited to the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 when the display command is received (third stop operation is off). For example, the lamp pattern data related to the headlamp 21 may be changed. Further, for example, the lamp pattern data may be changed not only when the display command is received but also in all the effects during the first ART.

[Third action]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), when the accessory pattern data instructing the operation of the accessory control board 78 is the interlocking accessory pattern data, the sub CPU 102 indicates the lamp state information. , An operation start request or an operation end request is added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information and the animation reproduction state information (S907). Further, when the lamp status information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking lamp pattern data, that is, heads with the interlocking lamp pattern data. The LED control board 72 is instructed to turn on or end the lighting of the lamp 21, the reel lamp 22, and the like (S919). Further, when the sound reproduction state information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking sound pattern data, that is, the interlocking sound pattern data. The sound board 71 is instructed to output the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R or to stop (end) the output (S936). Further, when the animation playback state information includes an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the effect related to the interlocking animation pattern data, that is, the interlocking animation pattern data. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to display the image or to stop (end) the display of the image (S946). Therefore, image effect (effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11), sound effect (effect by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R), lamp effect (effect by lighting the headlamp 21 and reel lamp 22 and the like). It is possible to synchronize the start timing and the end timing of the effect (effect by making the speaker) and the accessory effect (effect by the rotating accessory 123).

When synchronizing the start timing and end timing of all image effects, voice effects, lamp effects, and character effects, all animation pattern data should be linked animation pattern data, and all sound pattern data should be linked sound pattern data. Then, all the lamp pattern data may be converted into the interlocking lamp pattern data, and all the accessory pattern data may be converted into the interlocking accessory pattern data.

[Fourth action]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), when the sound pattern data related to the instruction to the sound board 71 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen. The sub CPU 102 adds the marker data defined in the sound effect sequence to the sound reproduction state information at predetermined time intervals (S938). Further, in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), when the set animation effect sequence data is a bonus final effect sequence, the sub CPU 102 acquires the sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S948). Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11). Therefore, even when the image effect and the sound effect are complicated, it is possible to prevent the image effect and the sound effect from being out of sync with each other in the middle of the effect.

The length of the divided moving image data (length of the moving image) can be arbitrarily set. For example, as described above, when the divided video data 0 to 4 are created by dividing the 5-second video data into five, the length of the first divided video data 0 is 0.5 seconds, and the subsequent divided video data. The length of 1 may be set to 1.5 seconds, and the length of the divided moving image data 2 may be set to 2 seconds. Further, the number of divided moving image data to be generated by dividing from a series of moving image data can be arbitrarily set. For example, the divided moving image data may be generated by dividing the moving image data for 5 seconds into 10 every 0.5 seconds. Further, the number of marker data and the timing of adding the marker data in the sound control task (see FIG. 122) to the sound reproduction state information are set so as to correspond to the number and length of the generated divided moving image data.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the image effect based on the above-mentioned marker data and the sound effect are synchronized (hereinafter, marker data interlocking) is described at the time of the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and marker data may be linked at the time of other effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the accessory control task (see FIG. 120), synchronization of the effect by adding the operation start request or the operation end request to the sound reproduction state information, the animation reproduction state information, and the lamp state information, and the marker data. The mode in which both interlocking is performed has been described. However, instead of this, only one of them may be performed. For example, when only the marker data interlocking is performed, when the marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data is set and the marker data is instructed to the sound board 71 regarding the sound pattern data constituting the sound production sequence. It may be added to the sound reproduction state information. Then, when the acquired sound reproduction state information includes marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data, the sub CPU 102 may reproduce the first divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data. In this way, the start timings of the audio effect and the image effect can be synchronized by interlocking with the marker data.

[Fifth action]
Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge execution to detect the selection when the finger is released from the touch input unit 31a. Therefore, even if a player or the like touches a finger outside the position corresponding to the desired item on the touch input unit 31a when selecting an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the desired item is not released. If the finger is moved to the position corresponding to the item to be performed and then the finger is released, the sub CPU 102 can detect the item desired by the player or the like as the selected item.

In the present embodiment, the mode in which the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge when the screen related to the above-mentioned mobile terminal cooperation function (see FIGS. 142 to 146) is displayed on the sub screen 113 has been described. .. However, the trigger for the sub CPU 102 to execute the OFF edge can be arbitrarily set. For example, the OFF edge execution may be performed only when a predetermined screen is displayed on the sub screen 113, and the ON edge execution may be performed at other times. For example, compared to the guide menu screen (see FIG. 140) and the unimemo menu screen (see FIG. 143), the button-shaped menu items (password input menus "0" to "9" and "A" to "A" are relatively small. The sub CPU 102 may execute the OFF edge only when the password input menu screen (FIG. 144) in which "F") is displayed is displayed.

Further, the sub CPU 102 may execute the OFF edge execution only for the items of the predetermined menu, and may execute the ON edge execution only for the items of the other menus. For example, OFF edge execution is performed only for "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" of the password input menu, which are relatively small button-shaped menu items on the password input menu screen (Fig. 144), and others. ON edge execution may be performed for the items of the menu of "Enter", "Delete", "Return to game" and "Return".

Further, it may be set whether or not to execute the OFF edge according to the type of the screen displayed on the sub screen 113. For example, when the screen related to the mobile terminal cooperation function is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the OFF edge execution is performed, and when the screen related to the effect during the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the ON edge execution is performed. You may go.

[Sixth action]
Further, in the present embodiment, in S983 of the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125), when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 288000, the sub CPU 102 sets the error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. To record. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for 3 minutes. Then, after 3 minutes have passed after displaying the warning screen on the main screen 111, the sub CPU 102 displays the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 so that the game can be restarted. Further, the error code recorded in the sub RAM 103 can be referred to on the error information history screen (see FIG. 135) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history processing (S1009) in the hall menu processing (see FIG. 129). .. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the output of the signal indicating that the touch input unit 31a is being operated continues for a predetermined time, and it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the period during which the game cannot be played.

The threshold value (288000 in this embodiment) of the operation command continuous counter in the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) can be arbitrarily set. When displaying a warning when the touch operation command or flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 2 hours, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter can be set to 144000. Good. Further, when the touch sensor relay board 73 transmits data every 100 msec, and when the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 4 hours. When displaying a warning or the like, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter may be set to 144000.

[7th action]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the maintenance process (see FIG. 136), the sub CPU 102 displays the grid line G (see FIGS. 137 and 139) on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. Further, when the finger moves while maintaining the state of touching the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is arranged at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. As described above, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger. Therefore, it is possible to recognize whether or not the position of the intersection of the grid lines G displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a are deviated from each other, so that the gaming machine can perform touch input. It is possible to confirm whether or not the position where the finger touches the portion 31a is accurately recognized. In addition, it is possible to visually check whether or not there is a deviation between the operating state of the touch input unit 31a and the mounting position.

In the present embodiment, when the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed, the grid line G is displayed so that the intersection is arranged at the initial position even when the touch input unit 31a is not touched by a finger. However, instead of this, the grid line G may be displayed on the touch panel maintenance screen 115 only when it is detected that the touch input unit 31a is touched by a finger.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a after changing the display position of the grid line G, the sub CPU 102 performs the grid line so that the intersection of the grid line G is arranged at the above-mentioned initial position. The mode of changing the display position of G has been described. However, instead of this, in the same case, in the sub CPU 102, the intersection of the grid lines G is arranged at a position where the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, that is, a position corresponding to the position where the finger was last touched. The state may be maintained.

The above-described embodiment will be the first embodiment, and each of the following other embodiments will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, regarding the setting change / confirmation history processing (FIGS. 130 to 134), the configuration for displaying the setting change confirmation history information has been described, but the second description will be described below. Like the pachislot machine 1 according to the embodiment, when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, even if only a person who has the administrator authority regarding the setting value in the hall (hereinafter, the administrator authority) can be authenticated so that it can be displayed. Good.

[Second Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has substantially the same basic configuration as that of the first embodiment except that it has an authentication function. In the following, the differences from those of the first embodiment will be described in detail.

In the present embodiment, when the medal sensor 46S is configured as a medal selector 46 including a CMOS image sensor 472 capable of capturing either the front or back surface of the medal or an image recognition processor, management capable of viewing setting change confirmation history information. A special key medal (hereinafter referred to as a key medal) indicating personal authority is prepared in advance, and is different from a normal medal for games based on a feature image stored in advance in a non-volatile memory or the like by the image recognition processor of the medal selector 46. It is configured to identify the insertion of a key medal indicating administrator authority. In the present embodiment, the control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76, and the sub CPU 102 executes the authentication processing according to the control program. The medals and key medals according to the present embodiment correspond to the game medium and the specific game medium according to the present invention, respectively.

FIG. 147 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an authentication function unit applied to setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. In order to identify the insertion of the key medal described above, the medal sensor 46S is configured as a medal selector 46 including a camera unit 47 and a medal solenoid 48, as shown in a block diagram in FIG. 147, and the control LSI 471 is a sub-relay board. It can be configured to be connected to the sub-control board 42 via 67. The medal solenoid 48 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54.

In this case, the camera unit 47 includes a CMOS image sensor 472, a plurality of LEDs 473 that irradiate a specific medal passing region on a medal rail (not shown), and a control LSI 471 connected to the CMOS image sensor 472. Have.

The CMOS image sensor 472 images a key medal moving on the medal rail and outputs the image data of the captured key medal to the control LSI 471. The LED 473 surface-emits light around the CMOS image sensor 472 and can irradiate medals moving on the medal rail with light. The control LSI 471 determines whether or not the object moving on the medal rail is a regular key medal based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 472, and outputs the determination result to, for example, the sub CPU 102. Serial communication is used between the CMOS image sensor 472 and the sub CPU 102.

The control LSI 471 includes a host controller (not shown), an image recognition DSP (digital signal processor) circuit, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory), a flash memory, an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit, and a medal counting circuit. The process itself for image recognition is the same as that known. As described above, the medal selector 46 and the camera unit 47 according to the present embodiment constitute a medium detection unit for detecting the game medium (for example, a medal) according to the present invention. The medium detection unit according to the present invention has a medium recognition means capable of recognizing the type of game medium (for example, a medal or a key medal). The control LSI 471 and the CMOS image sensor 472 according to the present embodiment constitute the medium recognition means according to the present invention.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the key medal, which is a specific game medium, has a specific symbol at least different from that of a normal medal formed on the front and back sides. Further, the key medal may have a portion having a color different from that of a normal medal. Further, the design may be a combination of at least an engraving or a pattern, the engraving and a pattern including one color. The sub CPU 102 holds a characteristic image of a regular key medal, for example, image data such as a pattern or color as image data for authentication, and is on the medal rail based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 472. By extracting feature image data such as the design and color of the moving object and collating it with the image data for authentication, it is possible to determine whether or not the key medal is a legitimate key medal.

The medal solenoid 48 rotates a select plate (not shown) arranged along the medal passage to guide the ejection path of the inserted medal to the medal chute on the payout outlet side, and an internal hopper device. It can be rotationally displaced to the guide position that guides it to the 43 side.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. For this setting change / confirmation history processing, [setting change / confirmation history] is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed in S1006 of FIG. 129 (when the determination in S1006 is YES), and the setting change confirmation history. The operation is started on condition that the enter button 28 is pressed while [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted on the screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132).

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 102 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (S1041). Specifically, a display prompting the insertion of the key medal is performed, and then, when the key medal is inserted, the key medal is imaged by the CMOS image sensor 472, and the control LSI 471 processes the imaged image data and inserts the key medal. By extracting the feature image data of the above and collating it with the feature image data stored in advance, it is transmitted to the sub CPU 102 whether or not the inserted key medal is a normal key medal, and the sub CPU 102 receives the determination result from the control LSI 471. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the authentication result is correct (S1042).

Here, when the authentication result is correct, that is, when it is determined that the authentication is OK (when the determination in S1042 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116b shown in FIG. 133. (S1043). As shown in FIG. 133, the setting change confirmation history screen 116b displays the setting change confirmation history information in which the operation type of the operation and the setting value when the operation is performed are displayed in association with each other in the "operation" column. It is a thing.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in S1043, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 has been operated and the last line has been reached (S1044). Here, when the select button 29 is operated and it is determined that it is the last line (when the determination in S1044 is YES), the page update process for continuing the scrolling of the page is performed (S1045). The sub CPU 102 detects that the select button 29 has been operated, and the highlighted cursor that selects and specifies the history of each line of the setting change confirmation history information is moved in order line by line, and the last line. The next page is displayed when the highlight is displayed. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the first page of 1 / N when the highlight is displayed on the last line of the last page of the N / N.

On the other hand, when the select button 29 is operated and it is determined that it is not the last line (when the determination in S1044 is NO), then, in the sub CPU 102, the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time. It is determined whether or not there is (S1046). Here, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1044 is YES), all the setting change / confirmation history data stored in the backup memory 108 are cleared (when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time). Batch deletion) and (S1047) end the process.

Further, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1046 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the enter button 28 is pressed (S1048).

If it is determined that the enter button 28 is not pressed (NO in S1048), the processing after S1044 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 28 has been pressed (when the determination in S1048 is YES), the display state of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 132 (see FIG. 133) is returned, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when S1048 is a YES determination, the display is returned to the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 132. However, when S1056 is a YES determination, the display state of the 1st / Nth page (1 / Nth page display state ( (See FIG. 133) may be returned.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an authentication process (see S1041 in FIG. 148) in the setting change / confirmation history process according to the second embodiment.

For the authentication process in FIG. 149, [setting change / confirmation history] is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed in S1006 of FIG. 129 (when the determination in S1006 is YES), and the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (See FIGS. 131 and 132), the operation is started on condition that the enter button 28 is pressed while [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted.

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 102 executes a key medal insertion request display process (S1061) that displays a screen prompting the key medal to be inserted on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the key medal insertion request display screen 116c according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 151 is an enlarged view showing the key medal insertion request display screen 116c in FIG. 150. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, in the key medal insertion request display process in S1061 of FIG. 149, the sub CPU 102 inserts a "* key medal" at, for example, a lower position of the setting change confirmation history information on the main screen 111. A message such as "Please. The set value will be displayed after inserting the key medal." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation transition screen.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 takes an image of the key medal inserted by the control LSI 471 of the camera unit 47 controlling the CMOS image sensor 472, and the control LSI 471 performs image analysis processing on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 472 to analyze the image. The medal insertion process for receiving the medal determination result of the process from the control LSI 471 is executed (S1062).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the inserted key medal is a regular key medal from the medal determination result from the control LSI 471 (S1063).

Here, when it is determined that the key medal is a regular key medal (when the determination in S1063 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processes after S1042 in FIG. 148. On the other hand, when it is determined that the inserted medal is not a regular key medal (NO in S1063), the sub CPU 102 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying on the main screen 111 that the authentication is NG. (S1064). In this case, the sub CPU 102 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of S1042 in FIG. 148.

In the present embodiment, the image read by the CMOS image sensor 472 is subjected to authenticity determination by the control LSI 471, but the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 472 is image-analyzed by the sub CPU 102 to determine the authenticity. You may do it.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the authentication NG notification screen 116d according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, in the authentication NG display process of S1064 in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 102 displays a message such as "The key medal is incorrect. Please start over." On the main screen 111. In the third embodiment described later, "The volume password is incorrect. Please start over.", And in the fourth embodiment, "The password is incorrect. Please start over." Message is displayed.

FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing a procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 153, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 by operating the setting key with the front door 2b open as the first step of confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information. Display the hall menu.

As the second procedure, the pachislot machine 1 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in a state where [setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified from the hall menu, and here. When the enter button 28 is pressed, the key medal insertion request display screen 116c (see FIG. 150) is displayed.

As a third procedure, the pachi-slot machine 1 receives the key medal and captures the key medal determination result output by the CMOS image sensor 472 of the camera unit 47.

As a fourth procedure, the pachi-slot machine 1 authenticates based on the determination result of the key medal read by the camera unit 47, and when the authentication is OK, displays the setting change confirmation history information (see FIG. 133) including the set value. ..

As described above, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 11 for displaying various images, an operation unit having an enter button 28 and a select button 29, and a medal selector 46 which is a medium detection unit for detecting medals. A camera unit 47, a main CPU 93 that is a control unit that controls games, and a sub CPU 102 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit has set values (for example, The display control unit includes a setting key type switch 52 which is a setting means for changing or confirming the settings 1 to 6) and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 93 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the means, a backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 102 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 102, and the sub CPU 102 changes the setting or confirms the setting in the backup memory 108. The medal selector 46 and the medal selector 46 are provided with a setting display function that stores the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 109 as the setting change confirmation history information and displays the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11. The camera unit 47 has a control LSI 471 and a CMOS image sensor 472 that are medium recognition means capable of recognizing the type of medal, and in the setting display function, the medal selector 46 and the camera unit 47 recognize the key medal that is a specific game medium. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the condition that the data has been changed.

With this configuration, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 can be displayed on condition that the key medal is recognized by the medium recognition means, and only the person who has the authority to have the key medal can display the setting change confirmation history information. Since it is possible to save and display the information, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the backup memory 108 and browses it on the liquid crystal display device 11. It may be configured to display the history.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific symbol at least different from the symbol of the normal medal is formed on the front and back of the key medal, and the game medium recognized by the medium recognition means (for example, a normal medal or a key medal). Is obtained from the medium detection unit, and the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 may be displayed on condition that the control LSI 471 determines that the key medal matches the key medal stored in the control LSI 471 in advance. ..

With this configuration, key medals owned only by authorized persons can be inserted from the insertion slot for inserting normal medals, so that the cost can be reduced without adding a function for identifying a special game medium. Can be done. The key medals are delivered when the pachislot 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority prepare in advance when changing the settings or confirming the settings.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. It is possible to provide a pachislot machine 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment describes a configuration for authenticating using a key medal so that only the administrator who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display the setting change confirmation history information. However, as in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment described below, when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, it may be configured to authenticate by an operation by the volume switch 107.

[Third Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has substantially the same basic configuration as that of the second embodiment except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from those of the second embodiment will be described in detail.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an operation member on the back side of the front door constituting the speaker volume adjusting means, for example, a slide switch, is set to a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, volume “loud”, “medium”, and “low”. It is configured to switch to one of the three volume positions corresponding to "" and to switch to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and manage when the switching operation order matches a preset order. I am trying to authenticate as a user with personal authority.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the present embodiment, the control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76, and the sub CPU 102 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a configuration of a volume switch 107 that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 155) of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 154, the volume switch 107 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub-control circuit 101, and a slide operation for setting the initial setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is possible. For example, the volume switch 107 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value of the pachislot machine 1, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 107 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the sub CPU 102 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 107.

On the other hand, when setting a user with administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 107 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 107 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from the volume position 2 (volume “medium”) in FIG. 154 to the volume position 1 (volume “low”), or a volume position 2 to the volume position 3 (volume position 3 (volume “low”). It is possible to hold in advance an operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”).

As a result, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 107, and the administrator determines whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume switch 107 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. That is, the volume switch 107 according to the present embodiment constitutes the non-gaming operation unit according to the present invention. The non-game operation unit is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, and is, for example, a setting key type switch 52, a volume switch 107, and a reset switch (not shown) provided inside (rear side) of the front door 2b. ) Etc. are included. On the other hand, the operation unit in the present invention is at least an operation unit capable of accepting the operation of the player, and for example, switches such as the enter button 28 and the select button 29 provided on the outside (front surface side) of the front door 2b are provided. included.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an authentication process in the setting change / confirmation history process of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. In this authentication process, [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed in S1006 of FIG. 129 (when the determination in S1006 is YES), and the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (FIG. 131, see FIG. 132), which is started by pressing the enter button 28 while [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted.

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 102 executes a volume password request display process (S1071) that displays a screen prompting the input of the volume password on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the volume password request display screen 116e of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 157 is an enlarged view of the volume password request display screen 116e in FIG. 156. As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, in the volume password request display process in S1071 of FIG. 155, the sub CPU 102 displays, for example, "* Operate the volume switch to enter the password. Password input." A message such as "The setting value will be displayed later." Is displayed together with the setting change confirmation history information.

After displaying the volume password request display screen 116e, the sub CPU 102 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 107, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (S1072).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 102 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with the preset authentication operation pattern. It is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not the two match (S1073). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (when the determination in S1073 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processes after S1042 in FIG. 148.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (when the determination in S1073 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying on the main screen 111 that the authentication is NG (when it is determined that S1073 is NO). S1064). As a result, the sub CPU 102 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of S1042 in FIG. 148. In the above authentication NG display process, the sub CPU 102 displays a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" on the main screen 111.

Note that FIG. 154 gives an example in which a volume switch 107 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 102 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and backup memory 108 are used. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 may be displayed on condition that the operation order is matched with the predetermined operation order stored in advance.

FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing a procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 158, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 by operating the setting key with the front door 2b open as the first step of confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information. Display the hall menu.

As the second procedure, the pachislot machine 1 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in a state where [setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified from the hall menu, and here. When the enter button 28 is pressed, the volume password request display screen 116e (see FIGS. 156 and 157) is displayed.

As a third procedure, the pachi-slot machine 1 accepts the input operation of the volume password by the volume switch 107 and takes in the input volume password.

As the fourth procedure, the pachislot machine collates the volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when the two match and the authentication is OK, the setting value is displayed together and the setting change confirmation is displayed. The history information (see FIG. 133) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

As described above, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 11 that displays various images, at least an enter button 28 and a select button 29 that are operation units that accept player operations, and a front door rear side. A non-game operation unit such as a slide switch that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 93 that controls the game, and a sub CPU 102 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11. The control unit includes a setting key type switch 52 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6), and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The display control unit includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time. , The main CPU 93 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 102 by the data transmitting means, and the sub CPU 102 is a backup memory when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation. A setting display function that stores setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC 109 as setting change confirmation history information in 108, and displays the setting change confirmation history information stored in backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. , You will be able to judge whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the backup memory 108 and browses it on the liquid crystal display device 11. It may be configured to display the history.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 107.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachislot 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 102 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. Further equipped with a detection function, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and on condition that the order of the acquired volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. The configuration may be configured to display the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. , Pachislot 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity can be provided.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment describes a configuration in which when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, only a person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall authenticates by operating the volume switch 107 so that the display can be displayed. However, as in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described below, when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured to authenticate using the password input from the input unit. May be good.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has substantially the same basic configuration as that of the second embodiment except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from those of the second embodiment will be described in detail.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the numeric keypad 113a (see FIG. 160) on the sub screen 113 of the liquid crystal display device 11, inputs a password using the numeric keypad 113a, and authenticates by comparing with a preset password. Has a function to perform.

As described above, the sub screen 113 is an area provided with the touch input unit 31a of the touch sensor module. In the area where the numeric keypad 113a is displayed on the sub screen 113, the coordinates of the button area corresponding to each number constituting the numeric keypad 113a are registered corresponding to each number. On the other hand, the coordinates are registered in the button area corresponding to each of the above numbers. As a result, when the button area corresponding to each number of the numeric keypad 113a displayed on the sub screen 113 is touched (contact operation), the sub CPU 102 recognizes the coordinates of the touched button area. be able to. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 can recognize that the contact input state, that is, the number (password) corresponding to each coordinate has been input based on each coordinate by a series of touch operations. In the present embodiment, the numeric keypad 113a, the decision button 113c described later, and the delete button 113d constitute a contact input unit that receives various contact operations in the present invention.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an authentication processing function based on the password input by the contact operation from the numeric keypad 113a displayed on the sub screen 113. In the present embodiment, the control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the ROM cartridge board 76, and the sub CPU 102 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an authentication process in the setting change / confirmation history process of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. In this authentication process, [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed in S1006 of FIG. 129 (when the determination in S1006 is YES), and the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (FIG. 131, see FIG. 132), which is started by pressing the enter button 28 while [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted.

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 102 executes a numeric keypad display process (S1081) for displaying the numeric keypad 113a on the sub screen 113 of the liquid crystal display device 11.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen 116f including the numeric keypad display area in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 161 is an enlarged view of the setting change / confirmation history screen 116f in FIG. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 the sub CPU 102 displays the numbers “0” to “9”, “*”, and “#” on the sub screen 113 of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the numeric keypad display process (S1081). A numeric keypad 113a having a symbol button is displayed. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the enter button 113c and the delete button 113d. The enter button 113c is a button instructing to determine the input TP password when the input of the touch panel password (hereinafter, also referred to as “TP password”) on the numeric keypad 113a is completed. The delete button 113d is a button instructing to delete the TP password entered with the numeric keypad 113a. The pressing of the decision button 113c and the delete button 113d can also be detected by the same processing method as the pressing of each numerical button on the numeric keypad 113a.

Further, the sub CPU 102 inputs a TP password on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11, for example, "* Operate the touch panel to enter the password. The set value is displayed after the password is entered." A prompting message is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history screen 116f.

After displaying the numeric keypad 113a and the message, the sub CPU 102 monitors the input of coordinate information (contact input state, that is, the password) sent from the touch input unit 31a in response to the operation of each numerical button on the numeric keypad 113a. Input processing is executed (S1082).

Next, when the respective coordinate information of the plurality of numerical buttons and the symbol buttons that have been touch-operated in order during the input monitoring of the coordinate information is input, the sub CPU 102 inputs a series of numerical values corresponding to the respective coordinate information from the respective coordinate information. It is specified as a TP password, and is collated with a predetermined contact input state set in advance, that is, a collation password, and it is determined whether or not the two match (S1083). Here, when it is determined that the TP password and the verification password match (when the determination in S1083 is YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the processes after S1042 in FIG. 148. Each number input from the numeric keypad 113a is changed to a "*" symbol on the password display unit 113d and displayed as a hidden character.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the TP password and the verification password do not match (when the determination in S1083 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying on the main screen 111 that the authentication is NG. (S1084). As a result, the sub CPU 102 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of S1042 in FIG. 148. In the above authentication NG display process, the sub CPU 102 displays a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" on the main screen 111. The password in this embodiment uses the numbers "0" to "9" and the symbols "*" and "#", but is not limited to these, and for example, the alphabets "A" to "A". You may further enable "Z", "a" to "z" to increase the numbers and characters that can be used as passwords. Also, the password is not limited to 4 digits, for example. It may be an 8-digit password.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 162, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed on the main screen 111 by operating the setting key with the front door 2b open as the first step of confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information. Display the hall menu.

As the second procedure, the pachislot machine 1 displays the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in a state where [setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified from the hall menu, and here. When the enter button 28 is pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen 116f (see FIGS. 160 and 161) including a message prompting the input of the TP password is displayed on the main screen 111, and the numeric keypad 113a is determined on the sub screen 133. The button 113c and the delete button 113d are displayed.

As a third procedure, the pachi-slot machine 1 inputs a series of numbers and symbols by the numeric keypad 113 from the touch input unit 31a constituting the sub screen 113 as the TP password.

As a fourth step, the pachislot 1 collates the entered TP password with the preset verification password (specific contact input state), and if both passwords match, the set values are displayed together. The setting change confirmation history information (see FIG. 133) is displayed.

As described above, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 11 that displays various images, an enter button 28 and a select button 29 that are operation units that accept various operations, and a contact input unit that accepts various contact operations. The touch input unit 31a and the ten-key 113a are provided, the main CPU 93 is a control unit that controls games, and the sub CPU 102 is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11. A setting key type switch 52 that enables change or confirmation of a set value and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit are provided, and the display control unit receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 93 is provided with a receiving means for receiving data, a backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 93 changes or confirms the setting by the data transmitting means. And the setting value is transmitted to the sub CPU 102, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time from the RTC 109 are sent to the backup memory 108. It has a setting display function that stores data as setting change confirmation history information and displays the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and has a predetermined contact input state in the contact input unit, that is, a ten key. The liquid crystal display device 11 is configured to display the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the condition that the correct touch panel (TP password) password is detected by the contact operation of 113a.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the condition that a predetermined contact input state, that is, a preset password is detected by the numeric keypad 113a. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined contact input state can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or, it is possible to provide a game machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the backup memory 108 and browses it on the liquid crystal display device 11. It may be configured to display the history.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predetermined contact input state may be configured to be a predetermined password.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate with a contact input state known only to an authorized person, that is, a password, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person. .. This password is shown when the pachislot 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those with authority use it when changing or confirming the settings.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. , Pachislot 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity can be provided.

As described above, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment is an input unit (touch input unit) in the pachislot 1 so that when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, only the administrator who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display it. The configuration for authenticating with the TP password input from 31a) has been described, but as in the Pachislot 1A according to the fifth embodiment described below, when displaying the setting change confirmation history information, the input unit on the mobile terminal It may be configured to authenticate using the password entered from.

[Fifth Embodiment]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game system 210 according to the fifth embodiment. The gaming system 210 includes a pachislot machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the game system 210 cooperates with the pachislot machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform an authentication process related to confirmation of setting change confirmation history information. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 constitute the mobile terminal and the server device according to the present invention, respectively.

In the game system 210, the pachi-slot machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to each function of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. It has a function of displaying a code on the liquid crystal display device 11. Specifically, the setting change confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content as displayed on the change setting confirmation history screen 116b shown in FIG. 133, and includes a setting value. The sub CPU 102 in the pachislot machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) a QR code (registered trademark) or the like displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to, for example, a storage device or a control program stored in the RAM. Do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change confirmation history information and the URL. The password input screen for inputting the password to the operation display unit 222 (see FIG. 170). Input screen display control unit that displays the above, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the above URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. When the authentication result is correct, it has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 221 according to the present invention, are the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result, respectively, in the present invention. The acquisition means and the history information display control means are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachislot machine 1A of the game system 210 according to the present embodiment. In this process, [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified from the hall menu (see FIG. 128) displayed on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot machine 1A, and the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (FIG. 131). , FIG. 132), on condition that the enter button 28 is pressed while [setting change / confirmation history] is highlighted.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU 102 reads the setting change confirmation history information from the backup memory 108 and generates a QR code including the setting change confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. QR code generation processing is performed (S1091).
Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a QR code display process of displaying the setting change confirmation history information read in S1091 and the generated QR code on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the manner shown in FIG. 166, for example (S1092). ..

After executing the QR code display process in S1092, the sub CPU 102 shifts to a state in which it can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the enter button 28 and the select button 29. To do. The enter button 28 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 29 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the enter button 28 and the select button 29 together, it is possible to instruct a data clear request.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 102 performs the following processing S1093-1095, which is equivalent to S1054-1056 in FIG. 130. Note that, in FIG. 164, the cursor movement process (page update process) is not shown when the select button 29 is operated, but in order to perform this process, in FIG. 130, between S1092 and S1093 in FIG. The processing of S1052 and S1053 will be added.

In FIG. 164, after the QR code display process of S1092, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time (S1093). Here, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1093 is YES), all the setting change / confirmation history data stored in the backup memory 108 are cleared (when it is determined that the enter button 28 is pressed at the same time). Batch deletion) and (S1094) end the process.

Further, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not pressed at the same time (when the determination in S1093 is NO), the sub CPU 102 then determines whether or not the enter button 28 is pressed (S1095). ).

If it is determined that the enter button 28 is not pressed (NO in S1095), the processing after S1093 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 28 has been pressed (when the determination in S1095 is YES), the display state of the setting change confirmation history screen 116a shown in FIG. 132 (see FIG. 133) is returned, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are pressed, the sub CPU 102 clears the setting change confirmation history information displayed together with the QR code 111a. May be good. In this case, the pachi-slot machine 1 displays the QR code 111a, but has not acquired the authentication result. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 can clear the setting change confirmation history information regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment. This process is started on condition that the QR code 111a displayed on the main screen 111 of the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the QR code 111a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the image data, and based on the image data, the display operation unit 222 displays the QR code in the manner shown in FIG. 169, for example. A QR code reading display process for displaying 222a is performed (S1101).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read QR code, extracts the setting change confirmation history information and the URL included in the QR code, and temporarily stores the QR code in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The QR code acquisition process to be held is executed (S1102). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 170), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (S1103).

After executing the password input display process in S1103, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 and performs the password authentication process via the following S1104 and S1105.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 170) (S1104), and from the numeric keypad 211b. Performs the process of accepting password input. Here, when the password is input (when the determination in S1104 is YES), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

The server device 240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240 after transmitting the input password received in the above S1104, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (S1105).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (when the determination in S1105 is NO), the control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222. Perform (S1106), and then end the process. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (when the determination in S1105 is YES), the control unit 221 is set to display the setting change confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102 on the display operation unit 222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (S1107). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 creates information for display in which the setting change confirmation history information held in S1102 is embedded (arranged) according to a preset display format. Based on this display information, the setting change confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 171).

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 116g including a QR code in the pachislot machine 1A of the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 167 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen 116g in FIG. 166. It is an enlarged figure.

As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the pachislot machine 1A, the sub CPU 102 displays the setting change confirmation history information and the QR code 111a on the main screen 11 of the liquid crystal display device 11 of the pachislot machine 1A in the QR code display process in S1092 of FIG. Display the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g including. As described above, the QR code 111a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g includes the setting change confirmation history information displayed on the main screen 111 and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service.

When displaying the QR code 111a in S1092, the sub CPU 102 shifts to the authentication service on the main screen 111, for example, "* Please read the QR code with a mobile terminal to access the authentication service." It may be configured to display a message prompting.

FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of a QR code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment. In the QR code reading display processing of S1101, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the QR code 222a as shown in FIG. 169 on the display operation unit 222.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment. In the password input display process of S1103, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 170 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 170, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying the password entered by the numeric keypad 222b. , The message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting the password to be entered is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 170, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 171, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g has a display format in which the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102 is, for example, the same as the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 133. It is displayed in. That is, in FIG. 171, the setting value of the setting change confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance supports the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 171, the scrolling of the setting change confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. doing. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing in S1107 during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 165, and then the enter button 222e displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change confirmation history information. , The state shifts to the acceptable state in which the page update request based on the operation of the select button 222f can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the select button 222f has been operated and the last page has been reached (S1108). Here, when the select button 222f is operated and it is determined that it is not the last line (when the determination in S1108 is YES), the page is updated to continue scrolling the page while the select button 222f is being operated. Process (S1109).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped (when the determination in S1108 is NO), the control unit 221 then determines whether or not the enter button 222e is pressed (S1110). .. Here, if it is determined that the enter button 222e is not pressed (when the determination in S1110 is NO), the processing after S1108 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 222e is pressed (when the determination in S1110 is YES), the above series of processes is terminated.

In the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the setting change confirmation history information is converted into a QR code as the so-called raw data on the pachislot 1A side and displayed on the main screen 111 (see S1091 and S1092 in FIG. 163). The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is performing a process of photographing the QR code displayed on the main screen 111 of the pachislot 1A and returning the setting change confirmation history information to the raw data (see S1101 and S1102 in FIG. 165).

On the other hand, many of today's mobile communication terminals are equipped with a function of reading and analyzing a QR code as standard equipment.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachislot machine 1A side.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it cannot be viewed in the same display format as the pachislot 1A side. , It is difficult to recognize the setting change confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the QR code is read, all the data obtained by the QR code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is obtained as shown in FIG. 171 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the QR code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachislot machine 1 and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

In the present embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. If you want to further secure the confidentiality, encrypt the setting change confirmation history information on the Pachislot 1A side, then generate and display the QR code, and use the above encryption for the dedicated application installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The configuration may be such that a decryption function for the corresponding setting change confirmation history information is added.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 168.

As shown in FIG. 168, as a first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1A has a setting key with the front door 2b open. The hall menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the operation.

As the second procedure, for the pachislot 1A, [Setting change / confirmation history] is selected and specified from the hall menu, and [Setting change / confirmation history] is displayed on the setting change confirmation history screen 116a (see FIGS. 131 and 132). When the enter button 28 is pressed in the highlighted state, a QR code including the setting change confirmation history information and the URL held in the backup memory 108 is generated, and the QR code is combined with the setting change confirmation history information. Display (see FIGS. 166 and 167).

As a third procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the QR code displayed on the pachi-slot machine 1 (see FIG. 169). After shooting the QR code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change confirmation history information and the URL included in the QR code.

As a fourth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 170) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the game system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the game system 210 or each pachislot machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a fifth step, when the authentication is OK in the fourth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change confirmation history information extracted in the third step on a screen in a predetermined display format (see FIG. 171). ) Is displayed on the display operation unit 222 with the content including the set value. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachislot 1A according to the present embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 11 that displays various images, an enter button 28 and a select button 29 that are operation units that accept various operations, and a control unit that controls games. The main CPU 93 and the sub CPU 102, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, are provided, and the control unit enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting key type switch 52 and a data transmitting means for transmitting various data to the display control unit are provided, and the display control unit has a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means and a non-energized state. The main CPU 93 is provided with a backup memory 108 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 109 for measuring the date and time, and the main CPU 93 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a setting value to the sub CPU 102 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the CPU 102 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 109 as the setting change confirmation history information in the backup memory 108. It has a setting display function that displays the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the enter is an operation unit in a state where the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data are displayed by the setting display function. It has a configuration in which setting change confirmation history information is displayed by a QR code when the button 28 is operated.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the day clock time means are stored in the backup memory 108 as the setting change confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , When the enter button 28 is operated, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the backup memory 108 can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 102 stores the displayed date and time data in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history. However, the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation history information of the backup memory 108 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the backup memory 108 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is based on the information from the predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. It may be configured to display the setting change confirmation history information in.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachislot machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachislot machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those with authority use it when changing or confirming the settings.

Further, the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachislot 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication, and the pachislot 1A is stored in the backup memory 108. It also has a generation function to generate the set change confirmation history information and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 240 authenticates the password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 by comparing it with the preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service machine that notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a two-dimensional code displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. A camera unit that captures images, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change confirmation history information and URL, an input screen display control unit that displays a password input screen for entering a password, and a password input screen. The authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered in the above to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and if the acquired authentication result is correct, the setting change confirmation history information is displayed. It is configured to have a history information display control unit to be displayed on the unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachislot 1A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and changes the setting to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 after being authenticated by the server device 240. Confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. , The pachislot machine 1A and the game system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity can be provided.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in each embodiment, when the "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the game machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in each embodiment, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in each embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are terminated on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) is performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in each embodiment, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART is fixed to "100". However, the "SBB" according to the present invention may have a configuration in which the number of games to be added to the number of staying games is added (added) to the number of staying games in the "SBB" as in the case of the "BB".

Further, in each embodiment, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" is set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for producing the additional additions A, B, and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Moreover, in each embodiment, the mode in which "50" is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART has been described. However, instead of this, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, one set "50" games), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games.
Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, the number of additional games may be drawn for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in each embodiment, as an accessory provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by driving a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

The gaming machine according to the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention has been described above. It is disclosed as an appendix that the above-mentioned gaming machine and gaming system basically have the following features and effects.

[Appendix 1-1]
In Embodiment 1-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
[Background technology]

As a conventional game machine, there is a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the reel according to the operation of the player. For example, the ratio of the paid-out game medium amount to the input game medium amount. It is known that the payout rate setting means for setting the payout rate (including the winning probability of replay, the same applies hereinafter) to one of a plurality of predetermined stages is provided.

In this type of gaming machine, there are six levels of ball ejection rates that indicate the ratio of the total number of medals paid out to the player to the total number of medals inserted into the gaming machine. The game is played with the set. The setting of the payout rate is usually changed by preparing a setting key owned by, for example, a store manager or a manager who has a certain authority of the hall or more and operating the setting key inside the housing. ..

Further, in a conventional game machine, in general, information necessary for performing various games, information on a set ball ejection rate, and the like are stored in a RAM (random) provided on a control board that controls game processing. It is temporarily stored in the access memory), and the information stored in the RAM is updated when the operating game or the setting of the ball output rate is changed.

Further, in the game machine shown in Patent Document 1 below, a plurality of games different from normal games such as low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. Therefore, in such game machines, low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. If the ball output rate setting is changed during operation, the information required for the operation of these games stored in the RAM is also deleted, and after the setting change, the game is performed in the normal game state. For this reason, if the setting is changed while the low-probability game that is disadvantageous to the player is operating, the low-probability game ends in the middle before the predetermined low-probability game period elapses, and the hall ( Amusement stores) sometimes suffered disadvantages.

Therefore, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, when changing the set value of the ball ejection rate, the main CPU uses the work at address 101 or higher when the second BB operating flag is not "on". It is designed to clear the area. On the other hand, when the second BB operating flag is "on", the work area other than the addresses 101 to 101 and 201 to 205 is cleared. After that, the main CPU updates the set value according to the operation of the reset button, and displays the payout rate set value at that time on the payout number display unit.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-204625 [Summary of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine as described above, the set value related to the payout rate is an element that is directly linked to the sales of the game store, and is an element that the player pays the most attention to. For this reason, there is a problem that someone arbitrarily changes or confirms the set value and enjoys an unreasonable profit. For example, the player may change or confirm the set value by some means in cooperation with a person who is not a hall clerk, or the player may change or confirm the set value in cooperation with a hall clerk who is not authorized to change the setting. There was a problem of enjoying unfair profits by confirming.

Moreover, in spite of the above-mentioned problems, in the conventional game machine, the setting value is changed in order to track that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts such as the so-called goto act have been performed. There was a problem that no consideration was given to saving and displaying the setting change confirmation information associated with the history, the confirmation history of the setting value, and the setting value and the date and time data, respectively.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and can save and display setting change confirmation information associated with setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data, respectively. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of confirming each history regarding a value and determining whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been made.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
The display control unit
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored in the storage holding storage area. Setting value storage means to be stored as setting change confirmation information,
It is provided with the setting display means for displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit.
The display control unit has the set value stored in the storage holding storage area when the operation unit is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the setting display means. A game machine characterized by displaying.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored as the setting change confirmation information in the storage holding storage area, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , The set value stored in the storage holding storage area can be displayed when the operation unit is operated. Therefore, when the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu is selected, it is necessary to provide a game machine capable of confirming each history related to the setting value and determining whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Can be done.

As a result, setting change or setting confirmation, setting change confirmation information corresponding to the setting value and date and time data can be saved and displayed, so that each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and illegal setting change or setting confirmation can be performed. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of determining whether or not it has been performed.

[Appendix 1-2]
In embodiment 1-2 of the present invention, embodiment 1-1 has the following configuration.

The display control unit acquires the date and time data for which the set value is received from the receiving means from the sundial time means, and associates the set value with the date and time data and information indicating the setting change. Remember

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

[Appendix 1-3]
Embodiments 1-3 of the present invention have the following configurations in Embodiments 1-1.

The display control unit acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the receiving means from the sundial time means, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the setting confirmation. Remember.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

[Appendix 2-1]
In Embodiment 2-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
[Background technology]

As a conventional game machine, there is a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the reel according to the operation of the player. For example, the ratio of the paid-out game medium amount to the input game medium amount. It is known that the payout rate setting means for setting the payout rate (including the winning probability of replay, the same applies hereinafter) to one of a plurality of predetermined stages is provided.

In this type of gaming machine, there are six levels of ball ejection rates that indicate the ratio of the total number of medals paid out to the player to the total number of medals inserted into the gaming machine. The game is played with the set. The setting of the payout rate is usually changed by preparing a setting key owned by, for example, a store manager or a manager who has a certain authority of the hall or more and operating the setting key inside the housing. ..

Further, in a conventional game machine, in general, information necessary for performing various games, information on a set ball ejection rate, and the like are stored in a RAM (random) provided on a control board that controls game processing. It is temporarily stored in the access memory), and the information stored in the RAM is updated when the operating game or the setting of the ball output rate is changed.

Further, in the game machine shown in Patent Document 1 below, a plurality of games different from normal games such as low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. Therefore, in such game machines, low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. If the ball output rate setting is changed during operation, the information required for the operation of these games stored in the RAM is also deleted, and after the setting change, the game is performed in the normal game state. For this reason, if the setting is changed while the low-probability game that is disadvantageous to the player is operating, the low-probability game ends in the middle before the predetermined low-probability game period elapses, and the hall ( Amusement stores) sometimes suffered disadvantages.

Therefore, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, when changing the set value of the ball ejection rate, the main CPU uses the work at address 101 or higher when the second BB operating flag is not "on". It is designed to clear the area. On the other hand, when the second BB operating flag is "on", the work area other than the addresses 101 to 101 and 201 to 205 is cleared. After that, the main CPU updates the set value according to the operation of the reset button, and displays the payout rate set value at that time on the payout number display unit.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-204625 [Summary of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine as described above, the set value related to the payout rate is an element that is directly linked to the sales of the game store, and is an element that the player pays the most attention to. For this reason, there is a problem that someone arbitrarily changes or confirms the set value and enjoys an unreasonable profit. For example, the player may change or confirm the set value by some means in cooperation with a person who is not a hall clerk, or the player may change or confirm the set value in cooperation with a hall clerk who is not authorized to change the setting. There was a problem of enjoying unfair profits by confirming.

Moreover, in spite of the above-mentioned problems, in the conventional game machine, the setting value is changed in order to track that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts such as the so-called goto act have been performed. Not only is there no consideration given to saving and displaying the setting change confirmation information associated with the history and setting value confirmation history, setting value and date and time data, and whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. In order to make a judgment, there is a problem that no consideration is given to saving and displaying the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and since it is possible to save and display the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data, the set value. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can not only judge whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed on the game, but also can judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display control unit performs the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value, and the sundial time in the storage holding storage area. A setting value storage means that stores date and time data from the means as setting change confirmation information,
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
When the setting change confirmation information of the storage holding storage area is displayed by the setting display means, the display control unit stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the storage holding storage area, and displays the display. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the browsing history in a unit.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation information of the storage retention storage area is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the storage retention storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display unit. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As a result, the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation information and the browsing history information associated with the date and time data can be saved and displayed, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed. Not only that, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 2-2]
Embodiment 2-2 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 2-1.

The display control unit acquires the date and time data in which the setting change confirmation information is displayed on the display unit from the sundial time means, and stores the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history in association with each other. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

[Appendix 2-3]
In embodiment 2-3 of the present invention, embodiment 2-1 has the following configuration.

The display control unit is displayed when the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change confirmation information of the storage holding storage area are displayed by the setting display means. The date and time data may be stored in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display unit.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are displayed among the setting change confirmation information, the displayed date and time data is stored and displayed in the storage holding storage area as a browsing history. The browsing history can be displayed in the section. Therefore, in the state where the setting change / confirmation history of the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed is selected, in addition to the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change confirmation information and the display of the setting value and the date / time data, the browsing history Can be displayed, so it can be determined whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

[Appendix 3-1]
In Embodiment 3-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
[Background technology]

As a conventional game machine, there is a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine that stops the rotation of the reel according to the operation of the player. For example, the ratio of the paid-out game medium amount to the input game medium amount. It is known that the payout rate setting means for setting the payout rate (including the winning probability of replay, the same applies hereinafter) to one of a plurality of predetermined stages is provided.

In this type of gaming machine, there are six levels of ball ejection rates that indicate the ratio of the total number of medals paid out to the player to the total number of medals inserted into the gaming machine. The game is played with the set. The setting of the payout rate is usually changed by preparing a setting key owned by, for example, a store manager or a manager who has a certain authority of the hall or more and operating the setting key inside the housing. ..

Further, in a conventional game machine, in general, information necessary for performing various games, information on a set ball ejection rate, and the like are stored in a RAM (random) provided on a control board that controls game processing. It is temporarily stored in the access memory), and the information stored in the RAM is updated when the operating game or the setting of the ball output rate is changed.

Further, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1 below, a plurality of games different from normal games such as low-probability games and high-probability games are performed. If the ball output rate setting is changed during operation, the information necessary for the operation of these games stored in the RAM is also deleted, and after the setting change, the game is performed in the normal game state. For this reason, if the setting is changed while the low-probability game that is disadvantageous to the player is operating, the low-probability game ends in the middle before the predetermined low-probability game period elapses, and the hall ( Amusement stores) sometimes suffered disadvantages.

Therefore, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, when changing the set value of the ball ejection rate, the main CPU uses the work at address 101 or higher when the second BB operating flag is not "on". It is designed to clear the area. On the other hand, when the second BB operating flag is "on", the work area other than the addresses 101 to 101 and 201 to 205 is cleared. After that, the main CPU updates the set value according to the operation of the reset button, and displays the payout rate set value at that time on the payout number display unit.
[Prior art literature]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-204625 [Summary of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine as described above, the set value related to the payout rate is an element that is directly linked to the sales of the game store, and is an element that the player pays the most attention to. For this reason, there is a problem that someone arbitrarily changes or confirms the set value and enjoys an unreasonable profit. For example, the player may change or confirm the set value by some means in cooperation with a person who is not a hall clerk, or the player may change or confirm the set value in cooperation with a hall clerk who is not authorized to change the setting. There was a problem of enjoying unfair profits by confirming.

Moreover, in spite of the above-mentioned problems, in the conventional game machine, the setting value is changed in order to track the fraudulent acts such as the so-called goto acts as described above. Not only is there no consideration given to saving and displaying the setting change confirmation information associated with the history and setting value confirmation history, setting value and date and time data, and whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. In order to make a judgment, there was a problem that no consideration was given to the fact that only a person having authority such as a store manager could display the setting change confirmation information.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and since only an authorized person can save and display the setting change confirmation information, whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can not only judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.
[Means to solve problems]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A medium detector that detects game media and
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display control unit performs the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value, and the sundial time in the storage holding storage area. A setting value storage means that stores date and time data from the means as setting change confirmation information,
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
The medium detection unit has a medium recognition means capable of recognizing the type of the game medium.
The setting display means is a game machine characterized in that the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area is displayed on condition that a specific game medium is recognized by the medium detection unit.

With this configuration, since the medium detection unit has a medium recognition means capable of recognizing the type of the game medium, the storage holding storage area is set on the condition that the setting display means recognizes a specific game medium by the medium recognition means. The stored setting change confirmation information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to have a specific game medium can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As a result, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is also an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a game machine that can determine whether or not it is.

[Appendix 3-2]
Embodiment 3-2 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 3-1.

When the setting change confirmation information of the storage holding storage area is displayed by the setting display means, the display control unit stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the storage holding storage area, and displays the display. The browsing history is displayed in the section.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation information of the storage retention storage area is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the storage retention storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display unit. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 3-3]
Embodiment 3-3 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 3-1.

In the specific game medium, a specific symbol at least different from the symbol of the normal game medium is formed on the front and back.
The setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area, provided that the setting display means is determined by the medium recognition means to match the specific game medium stored in the medium recognition means. Is displayed.

With this configuration, a specific game medium owned only by an authorized person can be inserted from an insertion slot into which a normal game medium is inserted, so that a function for identifying a special game medium can be inserted without adding a cost. Can be reduced. It should be noted that this specific game medium is delivered when the game machine is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority prepare in advance when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

[Appendix 4-1]
In Embodiment 4-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

A display unit that displays various images and
At least the operation unit that accepts the player's operation,
A non-game operation unit that the player does not operate,
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display control unit performs the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value, and the sundial time in the storage holding storage area. A setting value storage means that stores date and time data from the means as setting change confirmation information,
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
The setting display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area is displayed on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. It is possible to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As a result, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is also an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a game machine that can determine whether or not it is.

[Appendix 4-2]
The embodiment 4-2 of the present invention has the following configuration in the embodiment 4-1.

When the setting change confirmation information of the storage holding storage area is displayed by the setting display means, the display control unit stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the storage holding storage area, and displays the display. The browsing history is displayed in the section.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation information of the storage retention storage area is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the storage retention storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display unit. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 4-3]
Embodiment 4-3 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 4-1.

The non-game operation unit is an operation switch for adjusting the volume.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. It should be noted that this operation order is shown when the game machine is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

[Appendix 4-4]
Embodiment 4-4 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 4-1.

The operation switch is an operation switch capable of taking a plurality of arbitrary positions.
A position detection unit capable of detecting each position of the operation switch is further provided.
The setting display means is stored in the storage holding storage area on condition that the position information detected by the position detecting unit is acquired and matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance in the storage holding storage area. The setting change confirmation information is displayed including the setting value.

With this configuration, an operation switch for identifying an authorized person is provided by storing the operation order of a plurality of arbitrary positions as a predetermined operation order in advance and notifying the authorized person in advance of the operation order. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding.

[Appendix 5-1]
In Embodiment 5-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A contact input unit that accepts various contact operations and
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display control unit performs the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value, and the sundial time in the storage holding storage area. A setting value storage means that stores date and time data from the means as setting change confirmation information,
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
The setting display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area is displayed on condition that a predetermined contact input state is detected by the contact input unit.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the condition that the contact input unit detects a predetermined contact input state. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined contact input state can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. , Can determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As a result, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is also an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a game machine that can determine whether or not it is.

[Appendix 5-2]
In embodiment 5-2 of the present invention, embodiment 5-1 has the following configuration.

When the setting change confirmation information of the storage holding storage area is displayed by the setting display means, the display control unit stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the storage holding storage area, and displays the display. The browsing history is displayed in the section.

With this configuration, when the setting change confirmation information of the storage retention storage area is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the storage retention storage area as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display unit. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[Appendix 5-3]
In embodiment 5-3 of the present invention, embodiment 5-1 has the following configuration.

The predetermined contact input state is a predetermined password.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate with a contact input state known only to an authorized person, that is, a password, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person. .. This password is shown when the game machine is delivered to the hall, and only those who have the authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

[Appendix 6-1]
In Embodiment 6-1 of the present invention, a gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display control unit performs the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value, and the sundial time in the storage holding storage area. A setting value storage means that stores date and time data from the means as setting change confirmation information,
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
The display control unit displays the setting change confirmation information by a two-dimensional code when the operation unit is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the setting display means. A game machine featuring.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored as the setting change confirmation information in the storage holding storage area, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , The setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area when the operation unit is operated can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile terminal and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can display the setting change confirmation information. Not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural manipulation of the value has been performed, but it can also be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As a result, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is also an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a game machine that can determine whether or not it is.

[Appendix 6-2]
Embodiment 6-2 of the present invention has the following configuration in embodiment 6-1.

When the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control unit is read by the mobile terminal, the setting change confirmation information is displayed on the mobile terminal based on the information from the predetermined server device.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control unit is read by the mobile terminal, the information from the predetermined server device, for example, a predetermined password and the password entered by the mobile terminal are matched. On condition that, the setting change confirmation information can be displayed on the mobile terminal. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person to the gaming machine side. This password is shown when the game machine is delivered to the hall, and only those who have the authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

[Appendix 6-3]
Embodiment 6-3 of the present invention has the following configuration including the gaming machine of embodiment 6-1.

The gaming machine according to the 6-1 embodiment and
With mobile terminals
A server device that is connected to the network and manages the site for authentication,
Have,
The game machine
It has a generation means for generating the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area and the two-dimensional code of the address of the site.
The server device
It has an authentication means that authenticates the password from the mobile terminal by comparing it with a preset password and notifies the mobile terminal of the authentication result.
The mobile terminal
A display operation unit with display and operation functions,
An imaging means for capturing the two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit, and
An extraction means that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change confirmation information and the address.
Enter the password Input screen display control means to display the password input screen,
An authentication result acquisition means for transmitting the password entered on the password input screen to the server device based on the address and acquiring the authentication result notified from the server device.
When the acquired authentication result is correct, the history information display control means for displaying the setting change confirmation information on the display operation unit, and
Gaming system with.

With this configuration, the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control unit of the game machine can be read by the mobile terminal, and the setting change confirmation information can be displayed on the mobile terminal after being authenticated by the server device. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. It is possible to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

As a result, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, and it is also an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity. It is possible to provide a game system that can determine whether or not.

1,1A pachislot (game machine)
2 Exterior 2a Cabinet 2b Front door 3L Left reel (variable display means)
3C middle reel (variable display means)
3R right reel (variable display means)
4L Left display window 4C Medium display window 4R Right display window 11 Liquid crystal display device (notification means, display unit)
16 Start lever 17L Left stop button 17C Middle stop button 17R Right stop button 28 Enter button (operation unit)
29 Select button (operation unit)
31a Touch input unit (contact input unit)
46 Medal selector (media detector)
46S medal sensor (insertion operation detection means)
47 Camera unit (media detector)
52 Key type switch for setting (setting means, non-game operation unit)
64 Start switch (start operation detection means, operation unit)
91 Main control circuit (internal winning combination determining means, stop control means, game medium giving means)
93 Main CPU (control unit, data transmission means)
101 Sub-control circuit (assist state generating means, game count setting means, additional lottery means, game count counting means, assist state reoccurrence determining means)
102 Sub CPU (display control unit, receiving means, set value storage means, generating means, position detecting unit)
107 Volume switch (non-game operation unit)
108 Backup memory (storage storage area)
109 Real-time clock (RTC) (sundial means)
113a Numeric keypad (contact input section)
210 Game system 220 Mobile wireless communication terminal (mobile terminal)
221 Control unit (extraction means, input screen display control means, authentication result acquisition means, history information display control means)
222 Display operation unit 230 Network 240 Server device 471 Control LSI (media recognition means)
472 CMOS image sensor (media recognition means)

Claims (1)

A display unit that displays various images and
An operation unit that accepts various operations
A control unit that controls games
A display control unit that controls the display of the display unit is provided.
The control unit
Setting means that enables change or confirmation of set values,
A data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit is provided.
The display control unit
A receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, and a receiving means.
A storage storage area that can store the written information even when the power is off, and
Equipped with a sundial timekeeping means to measure the date and time,
The setting means transmits a command corresponding to the change or confirmation of the set value to the display control unit by the data transmission means.
When the data received by the receiving means is a command corresponding to the change or confirmation of the set value , the display control unit indicates to the storage holding storage area that the set value is changed or confirmed. A setting value storage means for storing the date and time data from the sundial time means, which indicates the date and time when the type information , the setting value, and the command corresponding to the change or confirmation of the setting value are received, as the setting change confirmation information.
A setting display means for displaying the setting change confirmation information stored in the storage holding storage area on the display unit is provided.
Wherein the display control unit, when the setting change confirmation information of the memory holding storage area is displayed on the display unit by the setting display unit shows the date and time at which the setting change confirmation information is displayed on the display unit A gaming machine characterized in that date and time data is stored as a browsing history in the storage holding storage area, and the browsing history is displayed on the display unit.

Images